TI-Nspire™ CX CAS

Reference Guide

Learn more about TI Technology through the online help at education.ti.com/eguide.

Important Information
Except as otherwise expressly stated in the License that accompanies a program, Texas
Instruments makes no warranty, either express or implied, including but not limited to
any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose,
regarding any programs or book materials and makes such materials available solely
on an "as-is" basis. In no event shall Texas Instruments be liable to anyone for special,
collateral, incidental, or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the
purchase or use of these materials, and the sole and exclusive liability of Texas
Instruments, regardless of the form of action, shall not exceed the amount set forth in
the license for the program. Moreover, Texas Instruments shall not be liable for any
claim of any kind whatsoever against the use of these materials by any other party.
© 2006 - 2019 Texas Instruments Incorporated

ii
Contents

Expression Templates 1
Alphabetical Listing 8
A 8
B 17
C 20
D 44
E 57
F 67
G 76
I 86
L 95
M 111
N 119
O 128
P 130
Q 139
R 142
S 157
T 182
U 197
V 198
W 199
X 201
Z 202

Symbols 210
TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 236
Graphics Programming 236
Graphics Screen 236
Default View and Settings 237
Graphics Screen Errors Messages 238
Invalid Commands While in Graphics Mode 238
C 239
D 240
F 243
G 245
P 246
S 248
U 250

iii
Empty (Void) Elements 251
Shortcuts for Entering Math Expressions 253
EOS™ (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy 255
TI-Nspire CX II - TI-Basic Programming Features 257
Auto-indentation in Programming Editor 257
Improved Error Messages for TI-Basic 257

Constants and Values 260

Error Codes and Messages 261
Warning Codes and Messages 269
General Information 271
Online Help 271
Contact TI Support 271
Service and Warranty Information 271

Index 272

iv
Expression Templates
Expression templates give you an easy way to enter math expressions in standard
mathematical notation. When you insert a template, it appears on the entry line with
small blocks at positions where you can enter elements. A cursor shows which element
you can enter.
Position the cursor on each element, and type a value or expression for the element.

Fraction template /p keys

Example:

Note: See also / (divide) , page 212.

Exponent template l key

Example:

Note: Type the first value, press l, and

then type the exponent. To return the cursor
to the baseline, press right arrow ( ¢).
Note: See also ^ (power) , page 213.

Square root template /q keys

Example:
Note: See also √() (square root) , page
223.

Nth root template /l keys

Example:

Note: See also root() , page 154.

Expression Templates 1
 Nth root template /l keys

e exponent template u keys

Example:

Natural exponential e raised to a power

Note: See also e^() , page 57.

Log template /s key

Example:

Calculates log to a specified base. For a

default of base 10, omit the base.
Note: See also log() , page 106.

Piecewise template (2-piece) Catalog >

Example:

Lets you create expressions and conditions

for a two-piece piecewise function. To add
a piece, click in the template and repeat the
template.
Note: See also piecewise() , page 132.

2 Expression Templates
Piecewise template (N-piece) Catalog >
Lets you create expressions and conditions Example:
for an N-piece piecewise function. Prompts
for N. See the example for Piecewise template (2-
piece).

Note: See also piecewise() , page 132.

System of 2 equations template Catalog >

Example:

Creates a system of two equations. To add

a row to an existing system, click in the
template and repeat the template.
Note: See also system() , page 181.

System of N equations template Catalog >

Lets you create a system of N equations. Example:
Prompts for N.
See the example for System of equations
template (2-equation).

Note: See also system() , page 181.

Absolute value template Catalog >

Example:
Note: See also abs() , page 8.

Expression Templates 3
 Absolute value template Catalog >

dd° mm’ss.ss’’ template Catalog >

Example:

Lets you enter angles in dd°mm’ss.ss ’’

format, where dd is the number of decimal
degrees, mm is the number of minutes, and
ss.ss is the number of seconds.

Matrix template (2 x 2) Catalog >

Example:

Creates a 2 x 2 matrix.

Matrix template (1 x 2) Catalog >

Example:
.

Matrix template (2 x 1) Catalog >

Example:

Matrix template (m x n) Catalog >

The template appears after you are Example:
prompted to specify the number of rows
and columns.

4 Expression Templates
Matrix template (m x n) Catalog >

Note: If you create a matrix with a large

number of rows and columns, it may take a
few moments to appear.

Sum template (Σ) Catalog >

Example:

Note: See also Σ() ( sumSeq), page 224.

Product template (Π) Catalog >

Example:

Note: See also Π() ( prodSeq), page 223.

First derivative template Catalog >

Example:

The first derivative template can also be

used to calculate first derivative at a point.
Note: See also d() (derivative) , page 221.

Expression Templates 5
 Second derivative template Catalog >
Example:

The second derivative template can also be

used to calculate second derivative at a
point.
Note: See also d() (derivative) , page 221.

Nth derivative template Catalog >

Example:

The nth derivative template can be used to

calculate the nth derivative.
Note: See also d() (derivative) , page 221.

Definite integral template Catalog >

Example:

Note: See also∫() integral() , page 221.

Indefinite integral template Catalog >

Example:

Note: See also ∫() integral() , page 221.

Limit template Catalog >

Example:

6 Expression Templates
Limit template Catalog >
Use − or ( −) for left hand limit. Use + for
right hand limit.
Note: See also limit() , page 6.

Expression Templates 7
Alphabetical Listing
Items whose names are not alphabetic (such as +, !, and >) are listed at the end of this
section, page 210. Unless otherwise specified, all examples in this section were
performed in the default reset mode, and all variables are assumed to be undefined.

abs() Catalog >

abs(Expr1) ⇒ expression

abs(List1) ⇒ list
abs(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns the absolute value of the
argument.
Note: See also Absolute value template,
page 3.
If the argument is a complex number,
returns the number’s modulus.
Note: All undefined variables are treated as
real variables.

amortTbl() Catalog >

amortTbl(NPmt ,N,I,PV, [Pmt ], [FV],
[PpY], [CpY], [PmtAt ], [roundValue ]) ⇒
matrix
Amortization function that returns a matrix
as an amortization table for a set of TVM
arguments.
NPmt is the number of payments to be
included in the table. The table starts with
the first payment.
N, I, PV, Pmt , FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 195.
• If you omit Pmt , it defaults to
Pmt =tvmPmt
( N,I,PV,FV,PpY,CpY,PmtAt ).
• If you omit FV, it defaults to FV=0.
• The defaults for PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are the same as for the TVM functions.

8 Alphabetical Listing
amortTbl() Catalog >
roundValue specifies the number of
decimal places for rounding. Default=2.
The columns in the result matrix are in this
order: Payment number, amount paid to
interest, amount paid to principal, and
balance.
The balance displayed in row n is the
balance after payment n.
You can use the output matrix as input for
the other amortization functions ΣInt() and
ΣPrn() , page 225, and bal() , page 17.

and Catalog >

BooleanExpr1 and BooleanExpr2 ⇒
Boolean expression
BooleanList1 and BooleanList2 ⇒
Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1 and BooleanMatrix2 ⇒
Boolean matrix
Returns true or false or a simplified form of
the original entry.
Integer1 andInteger2 ⇒ integer In Hex base mode:

Compares two real integers bit-by-bit using

an and operation. Internally, both integers
are converted to signed, 64-bit binary Important: Zero, not the letter O.
numbers. When corresponding bits are
compared, the result is 1 if both bits are 1;
otherwise, the result is 0. The returned In Bin base mode:
value represents the bit results, and is
displayed according to the Base mode.
You can enter the integers in any number
base. For a binary or hexadecimal entry, you In Dec base mode:
must use the 0b or 0h prefix, respectively.
Without a prefix, integers are treated as
decimal (base 10). Note: A binary entry can have up to 64 digits
(not counting the 0b prefix). A hexadecimal
entry can have up to 16 digits.

Alphabetical Listing 9
 angle() Catalog >
angle(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

Returns the angle of the argument,

interpreting the argument as a complex
number.
In Gradian angle mode:
Note: All undefined variables are treated as
real variables.

In Radian angle mode:

angle(List1) ⇒ list
angle(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a list or matrix of angles of the
elements in List1 or Matrix1, interpreting
each element as a complex number that
represents a two-dimensional rectangular
coordinate point.

ANOVA Catalog >

ANOVA List1,List2[,List3,...,List20][,Flag]
Performs a one-way analysis of variance for
comparing the means of two to 20
populations. A summary of results is stored
in the stat.results variable. (page 176)
Flag=0 for Data, Flag=1 for Stats

Output variable Description

stat. F Value of the F statistic

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom of the groups

stat.SS Sum of squares of the groups

stat.MS Mean squares for the groups

10 Alphabetical Listing
Output variable Description
stat.dfError Degrees of freedom of the errors

stat.SSError Sum of squares of the errors

stat.MSError Mean square for the errors

stat.sp Pooled standard deviation

stat.xbarlist Mean of the input of the lists

stat.CLowerList 95% confidence intervals for the mean of each input list

stat.CUpperList 95% confidence intervals for the mean of each input list

ANOVA2way Catalog >

ANOVA2way List1,List2[,List3,…,List10]
[,levRow]
Computes a two-way analysis of variance for
comparing the means of two to 10
populations. A summary of results is stored
in the stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
LevRow=0 for Block
LevRow=2,3,...,Len-1, for Two Factor,
where Len=length( List1)=length( List2) = …
= length( List10) and Len / LevRow Π
{2,3,…}
Outputs: Block Design

Output variable Description

stat. F F statistic of the column factor
stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom of the column factor

stat.SS Sum of squares of the column factor

stat.MS Mean squares for column factor

stat. FBlock F statistic for factor

stat.PValBlock Least probability at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.dfBlock Degrees of freedom for factor

stat.SSBlock Sum of squares for factor

Alphabetical Listing 11
Output variable Description
stat.MSBlock Mean squares for factor

stat.dfError Degrees of freedom of the errors

stat.SSError Sum of squares of the errors

stat.MSError Mean squares for the errors

stat.s Standard deviation of the error

COLUMN FACTOR Outputs

Output variable Description

stat. Fcol F statistic of the column factor

stat.PValCol Probability value of the column factor

stat.dfCol Degrees of freedom of the column factor

stat.SSCol Sum of squares of the column factor

stat.MSCol Mean squares for column factor

ROW FACTOR Outputs

Output variable Description

stat. FRow F statistic of the row factor

stat.PValRow Probability value of the row factor

stat.dfRow Degrees of freedom of the row factor

stat.SSRow Sum of squares of the row factor

stat.MSRow Mean squares for row factor

INTERACTION Outputs

Output variable Description

stat. FInteract F statistic of the interaction

stat.PValInteract Probability value of the interaction

stat.dfInteract Degrees of freedom of the interaction

stat.SSInteract Sum of squares of the interaction

stat.MSInteract Mean squares for interaction

ERROR Outputs

12 Alphabetical Listing
Output variable Description
stat.dfError Degrees of freedom of the errors

stat.SSError Sum of squares of the errors

stat.MSError Mean squares for the errors

s Standard deviation of the error

Ans /v keys
Ans ⇒ value
Returns the result of the most recently
evaluated expression.

approx() Catalog >

approx(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns the evaluation of the argument as
an expression containing decimal values,
when possible, regardless of the current
Auto or Approximate mode.
This is equivalent to entering the argument
and pressing /·.

approx(List1) ⇒ list
approx(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a list or matrix where each
element has been evaluated to a decimal
value, when possible.

►approxFraction() Catalog >

Expr►approxFraction([Tol]) ⇒
expression
List►approxFraction([Tol ]) ⇒ list
Matrix►approxFraction([Tol ]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the input as a fraction, using a
tolerance of Tol . If Tol is omitted, a
tolerance of 5.E-14 is used.

Alphabetical Listing 13
 ►approxFraction() Catalog >
Note: You can insert this function from the
computer keyboard by typing
@>approxFraction(...).

approxRational() Catalog >

approxRational(Expr[, Tol ]) ⇒ expression
approxRational(List [, Tol ]) ⇒ list
approxRational(Matrix [, Tol ]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the argument as a fraction using a
tolerance of Tol . If Tol is omitted, a
tolerance of 5.E-14 is used.

arccos() See cos⁻¹(), page 31.

arccosh() See cosh⁻¹(), page 32.

arccot() See cot ⁻¹(), page 33.

arccoth() See coth⁻¹(), page 34.

arccsc() See csc ⁻¹(), page 37.

arccsch() See csch⁻¹(), page 37.

14 Alphabetical Listing
arcLen() Catalog >
arcLen(Expr1,Var,Start ,End) ⇒
expression
Returns the arc length of Expr1 from
Start to End with respect to variable Var.
Arc length is calculated as an integral
assuming a function mode definition.
arcLen(List1,Var,Start ,End) ⇒ list
Returns a list of the arc lengths of each
element of List1 from Start to End with
respect to Var.

arcsec() See sec ⁻¹(), page 157.

arcsech() See sech⁻¹(), page 158.

arcsin() See sin⁻¹(), page 167.

arcsinh() See sinh⁻¹(), page 168.

arctan() See tan⁻¹(), page 183.

arctanh() See tanh⁻¹(), page 184.

augment() Catalog >

augment(List1, List2) ⇒ list

Alphabetical Listing 15
 augment() Catalog >
Returns a new list that is List2 appended to
the end of List1.
augment(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns a new matrix that is Matrix2
appended to Matrix1. When the “,”
character is used, the matrices must have
equal row dimensions, and Matrix2 is
appended to Matrix1 as new columns.
Does not alter Matrix1 or Matrix2.

avgRC() Catalog >

avgRC(Expr1, Var [=Value ] [, Step]) ⇒
expression
avgRC(Expr1, Var [=Value ] [, List1]) ⇒
list
avgRC(List1, Var [=Value ] [, Step]) ⇒
list
avgRC(Matrix1, Var [=Value ] [, Step]) ⇒
matrix
Returns the forward-difference quotient
(average rate of change).
Expr1 can be a user-defined function name
(see Func).
When Value is specified, it overrides any
prior variable assignment or any current “|”
substitution for the variable.
Step is the step value. If Step is omitted, it
defaults to 0.001.
Note that the similar function centralDiff()
uses the central-difference quotient.

16 Alphabetical Listing
B

bal() Catalog >

bal(NPmt ,N,I,PV ,[Pmt ], [FV], [PpY],
[CpY], [PmtAt ], [roundValue ]) ⇒ value
bal(NPmt ,amortTable ) ⇒ value
Amortization function that calculates
schedule balance after a specified payment.
N, I, PV, Pmt , FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 195.
NPmt specifies the payment number after
which you want the data calculated.
N, I, PV, Pmt , FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 195.
• If you omit Pmt , it defaults to
Pmt =tvmPmt
( N,I,PV,FV,PpY,CpY,PmtAt ).
• If you omit FV, it defaults to FV=0.
• The defaults for PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are the same as for the TVM functions.
roundValue specifies the number of
decimal places for rounding. Default=2.
bal( NPmt ,amortTable ) calculates the
balance after payment number NPmt ,
based on amortization table amortTable .
The amortTable argument must be a
matrix in the form described under
amortTbl() , page 8.
Note: See also ΣInt() and ΣPrn() , page 225.

►Base2 Catalog >

Integer1 ►Base2 ⇒ integer
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>Base2.

Alphabetical Listing 17
 ►Base2 Catalog >
Converts Integer1 to a binary number.
Binary or hexadecimal numbers always
have a 0b or 0h prefix, respectively. Use a
zero, not the letter O, followed by b or h.
0b binaryNumber
0h hexadecimalNumber
A binary number can have up to 64 digits. A
hexadecimal number can have up to 16.
Without a prefix, Integer1 is treated as
decimal (base 10). The result is displayed in
binary, regardless of the Base mode.
Negative numbers are displayed in “two's
complement” form. For example,
⁻1 is displayed as
0hFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  in Hex base mode
0b111...111 (64  1’s)  in Binary base mode
⁻263 is displayed as
0h8000000000000000  in Hex base mode
0b100...000 (63 zeros)  in Binary base mode
If you enter a decimal integer that is
outside the range of a signed, 64-bit binary
form, a symmetric modulo operation is
used to bring the value into the appropriate
range. Consider the following examples of
values outside the range.
263 becomes ⁻263 and is displayed as
0h8000000000000000  in Hex base mode
0b100...000 (63 zeros)  in Binary base mode
264 becomes 0 and is displayed as
0h0  in Hex base mode
0b0  in Binary base mode
⁻263 − 1 becomes 263 − 1 and is displayed
as
0h7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  in Hex base mode
0b111...111 (64  1’s)  in Binary base mode

►Base10 Catalog >

Integer1 ►Base10 ⇒ integer

18 Alphabetical Listing
►Base10 Catalog >
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>Base10.
Converts Integer1 to a decimal (base 10)
number. A binary or hexadecimal entry
must always have a 0b or 0h prefix,
respectively.
0b binaryNumber
0h hexadecimalNumber
Zero, not the letter O, followed by b or h.
A binary number can have up to 64 digits. A
hexadecimal number can have up to 16.
Without a prefix, Integer1 is treated as
decimal. The result is displayed in decimal,
regardless of the Base mode.

►Base16 Catalog >

Integer1 ►Base16 ⇒ integer
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>Base16.
Converts Integer1 to a hexadecimal
number. Binary or hexadecimal numbers
always have a 0b or 0h prefix, respectively.
0b binaryNumber
0h hexadecimalNumber
Zero, not the letter O, followed by b or h.
A binary number can have up to 64 digits. A
hexadecimal number can have up to 16.
Without a prefix, Integer1 is treated as
decimal (base 10). The result is displayed in
hexadecimal, regardless of the Base mode.
If you enter a decimal integer that is too
large for a signed, 64-bit binary form, a
symmetric modulo operation is used to
bring the value into the appropriate range.
For more information, see ►Base2, page
17.

Alphabetical Listing 19
 binomCdf() Catalog >
binomCdf(n,p) ⇒ list
binomCdf(n,p,lowBound,upBound) ⇒
number if lowBound and upBound are
numbers, list if lowBound and upBound are
lists
binomCdf(n,p,upBound)for P(0≤X≤upBound)
⇒ number if upBound is a number, list if
upBound is a list
Computes a cumulative probability for the
discrete binomial distribution with n number
of trials and probability p of success on each
trial.
For P(X ≤ upBound), set lowBound=0

binomPdf() Catalog >

binomPdf(n,p) ⇒ list
binomPdf(n,p,XVal ) ⇒ number if XVal is a
number, list if XVal is a list
Computes a probability for the discrete
binomial distribution with n number of trials
and probability p of success on each trial.

Catalog >
ceiling(Expr1) ⇒ integer
Returns the nearest integer that is ≥ the
argument.
The argument can be a real or a complex
number.
Note: See also floor() .
ceiling(List1) ⇒ list
ceiling(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a list or matrix of the ceiling of
each element.

20 Alphabetical Listing
centralDiff() Catalog >
centralDiff(Expr1,Var [=Value ][,Step]) ⇒
expression
centralDiff(Expr1,Var [,Step])|Var=Value
⇒ expression
centralDiff(Expr1,Var [=Value ][,List ]) ⇒
list
centralDiff(List1,Var [=Value ][,Step]) ⇒
list
centralDiff(Matrix1,Var [=Value ][,Step])
⇒ matrix
Returns the numerical derivative using the
central difference quotient formula.
When Value is specified, it overrides any
prior variable assignment or any current “|”
substitution for the variable.
Step is the step value. If Step is omitted, it
defaults to 0.001.
When using List1 or Matrix1, the operation
gets mapped across the values in the list or
across the matrix elements.
Note: See also avgRC() and d() .

cFactor() Catalog >

cFactor(Expr1[,Var]) ⇒ expression
cFactor(List1[,Var]) ⇒ list
cFactor(Matrix1[,Var]) ⇒ matrix
cFactor( Expr1) returns Expr1 factored with
respect to all of its variables over a
common denominator.
Expr1 is factored as much as possible
toward linear rational factors even if this
introduces new non-real numbers. This
alternative is appropriate if you want
factorization with respect to more than one
variable.

Alphabetical Listing 21
 cFactor() Catalog >
cFactor( Expr1,Var) returns Expr1 factored
with respect to variable Var.
Expr1 is factored as much as possible
toward factors that are linear in Var, with
perhaps non-real constants, even if it
introduces irrational constants or
subexpressions that are irrational in other
variables.
The factors and their terms are sorted with
Var as the main variable. Similar powers of
Var are collected in each factor. Include
Var if factorization is needed with respect
to only that variable and you are willing to
accept irrational expressions in any other
variables to increase factorization with
respect to Var. There might be some
incidental factoring with respect to other
variables.
For the Auto setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode, including Var also
permits approximation with floating-point
coefficients where irrational coefficients
cannot be explicitly expressed concisely in
terms of the built-in functions. Even when
there is only one variable, including Var
might yield more complete factorization. To see the entire result,
press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
Note: See also factor() . cursor.

char() Catalog >

char(Integer) ⇒ character
Returns a character string containing the
character numbered Integer from the
handheld character set. The valid range for
Integer is 0–65535.

22 Alphabetical Listing
charPoly() Catalog >
charPoly(squareMatrix,Var) ⇒
polynomial expression
charPoly(squareMatrix,Expr) ⇒
polynomial expression
charPoly(squareMatrix1,Matrix2) ⇒
polynomial expression
Returns the characteristic polynomial of
squareMatrix . The characteristic
polynomial of n×n matrix A, denoted by p
( λ), is the polynomial defined by A

p (λ) = det(λ•I−A)
A
where I denotes the n×n identity matrix.
squareMatrix1 and squareMatrix2 must
have the equal dimensions.

χ22way Catalog >

χ 22way obsMatrix
chi22way obsMatrix
Computes a χ 2 test for association on the
two-way table of counts in the observed
matrix obsMatrix . A summary of results is
stored in the stat.results variable. (page
176)
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a matrix, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat. χ2 Chi square stat: sum (observed - expected)2/expected

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom for the chi square statistics

stat.ExpMat Matrix of expected elemental count table, assuming null hypothesis

stat.CompMat Matrix of elemental chi square statistic contributions

Alphabetical Listing 23
 χ2Cdf() Catalog >
χ 2Cdf(lowBound,upBound,df )
⇒ number if
lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if
lowBound and upBound are lists
chi2Cdf(lowBound,upBound,df ) ⇒ number
if lowBound and upBound are numbers, list
if lowBound and upBound are lists
Computes the χ 2 distribution probability
between lowBound and upBound for the
specified degrees of freedom df .
For P( X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = 0.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

χ2GOF Catalog >

χ 2GOF obsList ,expList ,df
chi2GOF obsList ,expList ,df
Performs a test to confirm that sample data
is from a population that conforms to a
specified distribution. obsList is a list of
counts and must contain integers. A
summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat. χ2 Chi square stat: sum((observed - expected)2/expected

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom for the chi square statistics

stat.CompList Elemental chi square statistic contributions

χ2Pdf() Catalog >

χ 2Pdf(XVal ,df )
⇒ number if XVal is a
number, list if XVal is a list

24 Alphabetical Listing
χ2Pdf() Catalog >
chi2Pdf(XVal ,df ) ⇒ number if XVal is a
number, list if XVal is a list
Computes the probability density function
(pdf) for the χ 2 distribution at a specified
XVal value for the specified degrees of
freedom df .
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

ClearAZ Catalog >

ClearAZ
Clears all single-character variables in the
current problem space.
If one or more of the variables are locked,
this command displays an error message
and deletes only the unlocked variables. See
unLock, page 197.

ClrErr Catalog >

ClrErr For an example of ClrErr , See Example 2
under the Try command, page 191.
Clears the error status and sets system
variable errCode to zero.
The Else clause of the Try...Else...EndTry
block should use ClrErr or PassErr. If the
error is to be processed or ignored, use
ClrErr. If what to do with the error is not
known, use PassErr to send it to the next
error handler. If there are no more pending
Try...Else...EndTry error handlers, the error
dialog box will be displayed as normal.
Note: See also PassErr, page 131, and Try,
page 191.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product guidebook.

Alphabetical Listing 25
 colAugment() Catalog >
colAugment(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns a new matrix that is Matrix2
appended to Matrix1. The matrices must
have equal column dimensions, and
Matrix2 is appended to Matrix1 as new
rows. Does not alter Matrix1 or Matrix2.

colDim() Catalog >

colDim(Matrix ) ⇒ expression
Returns the number of columns contained
in Matrix .
Note: See also rowDim() .

colNorm() Catalog >

colNorm(Matrix ) ⇒ expression
Returns the maximum of the sums of the
absolute values of the elements in the
columns in Matrix .
Note: Undefined matrix elements are not
allowed. See also rowNorm() .

comDenom() Catalog >

comDenom(Expr1[,Var]) ⇒ expression
comDenom(List1[,Var]) ⇒ list
comDenom(Matrix1[,Var]) ⇒ matrix
comDenom( Expr1) returns a reduced ratio
of a fully expanded numerator over a fully
expanded denominator.

26 Alphabetical Listing
comDenom() Catalog >
comDenom( Expr1,Var) returns a reduced
ratio of numerator and denominator
expanded with respect to Var. The terms
and their factors are sorted with Var as the
main variable. Similar powers of Var are
collected. There might be some incidental
factoring of the collected coefficients.
Compared to omitting Var, this often saves
time, memory, and screen space, while
making the expression more
comprehensible. It also makes subsequent
operations on the result faster and less
likely to exhaust memory.
If Var does not occur in Expr1, comDenom
( Expr1,Var) returns a reduced ratio of an
unexpanded numerator over an unexpanded
denominator. Such results usually save even
more time, memory, and screen space.
Such partially factored results also make
subsequent operations on the result much
faster and much less likely to exhaust
memory.
Even when there is no denominator, the
comden function is often a fast way to
achieve partial factorization if factor() is
too slow or if it exhausts memory.
Hint: Enter this comden() function definition
and routinely try it as an alternative to
comDenom() and factor() .

completeSquare () Catalog >

completeSquare(ExprOrEqn, Var) ⇒
expression or equation
completeSquare(ExprOrEqn, Var^Power)
⇒ expression or equation
completeSquare(ExprOrEqn, Var1, Var2
[,...]) ⇒ expression or equation
completeSquare(ExprOrEqn, {Var1, Var2
[,...]}) ⇒ expression or equation
Converts a quadratic polynomial expression
of the form a•x2+b•x+c into the form a•(x-h)
2+k

Alphabetical Listing 27
 completeSquare () Catalog >
- or -
Converts a quadratic equation of the form
a•x2+b•x+c=d into the form a•(x-h) 2=k
The first argument must be a quadratic
expression or equation in standard form
with respect to the second argument.
The Second argument must be a single
univariate term or a single univariate term
raised to a rational power, for example
x, y2, or z(1/3).
The third and fourth syntax attempt to
complete the square with respect to
variables Var1, Var2 [,… ]).

conj() Catalog >

conj(Expr1) ⇒ expression
conj(List1) ⇒ list
conj(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns the complex conjugate of the
argument.
Note: All undefined variables are treated as
real variables.

constructMat() Catalog >

constructMat
(Expr,Var1,Var2,numRows,numCols) ⇒
matrix
Returns a matrix based on the arguments.
Expr is an expression in variables Var1 and
Var2. Elements in the resulting matrix are
formed by evaluating Expr for each
incremented value of Var1 and Var2.
Var1 is automatically incremented from 1
through numRows. Within each row, Var2
is incremented from 1 through numCols.

28 Alphabetical Listing
CopyVar Catalog >
CopyVar Var1, Var2
CopyVar Var1., Var2.
CopyVar Var1, Var2 copies the value of
variable Var1 to variable Var2, creating
Var2 if necessary. Variable Var1 must have
a value.
If Var1 is the name of an existing user-
defined function, copies the definition of
that function to function Var2. Function
Var1 must be defined.
Var1 must meet the variable-naming
requirements or must be an indirection
expression that simplifies to a variable
name meeting the requirements.
CopyVar Var1., Var2. copies all members
of the Var1. variable group to the Var2.
group, creating Var2. if necessary.
Var1. must be the name of an existing
variable group, such as the statistics stat .nn
results, or variables created using the
LibShortcut() function. If Var2. already
exists, this command replaces all members
that are common to both groups and adds
the members that do not already exist. If
one or more members of Var2. are locked,
all members of Var2. are left unchanged.

corrMat() Catalog >

corrMat(List1,List2[,…[,List20]])
Computes the correlation matrix for the
augmented matrix [List1, List2, ..., List20].

►cos Catalog >

Expr ►cos
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>cos.
Represents Expr in terms of cosine. This is
a display conversion operator. It can be
used only at the end of the entry line.

Alphabetical Listing 29
 ►cos Catalog >
►cos reduces all powers of
    sin(...) modulo 1−cos(...)^2
so that any remaining powers of cos(...)
have exponents in the range (0, 2). Thus,
the result will be free of sin(...) if and only
if sin(...) occurs in the given expression only
to even powers.
Note: This conversion operator is not
supported in Degree or Gradian Angle
modes. Before using it, make sure that the
Angle mode is set to Radians and that Expr
does not contain explicit references to
degree or gradian angles.

cos() µ key
cos(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

cos(List1) ⇒ list
cos( Expr1) returns the cosine of the
argument as an expression.
cos( List1) returns a list of the cosines of all
elements in List1.
Note: The argument is interpreted as a
degree, gradian or radian angle, according In Gradian angle mode:
to the current angle mode setting. You can
use °, G, or r to override the angle mode
temporarily.

In Radian angle mode:

cos(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix cosine of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the cosine of each element.

30 Alphabetical Listing
cos() µ key
When a scalar function f(A) operates on
squareMatrix1 (A), the result is calculated
by the algorithm:
Compute the eigenvalues ( λ ) and
i
eigenvectors (Vi) of A.
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
Also, it cannot have symbolic variables that
have not been assigned a value.
Form the matrices:

Then A = X B X⁻¹ and f(A) = X f(B) X⁻¹. For

example, cos(A) = X cos(B) X⁻¹ where:
cos(B) =

All computations are performed using

floating-point arithmetic.

cos⁻¹() µ key
cos⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

cos⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
cos ⁻¹( Expr1) returns the angle whose
cosine is Expr1 as an expression. In Gradian angle mode:
cos ⁻¹( List1) returns a list of the inverse
cosines of each element of List1.
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
gradian or radian angle, according to the In Radian angle mode:
current angle mode setting.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arccos(...).

Alphabetical Listing 31
 cos⁻¹() µ key
cos⁻¹(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode and Rectangular
Complex Format:
Returns the matrix inverse cosine of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the inverse cosine of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.
To see the entire result,
press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.

cosh() Catalog >

cosh(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

cosh(List1) ⇒ list
cosh( Expr1) returns the hyperbolic cosine
of the argument as an expression.
cosh( List1) returns a list of the hyperbolic
cosines of each element of List1.
cosh(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix hyperbolic cosine of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the hyperbolic cosine of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

cosh⁻¹() Catalog >

cosh⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression

cosh⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
cosh⁻¹( Expr1) returns the inverse
hyperbolic cosine of the argument as an
expression.

32 Alphabetical Listing
cosh⁻¹() Catalog >
cosh⁻¹( List1) returns a list of the inverse
hyperbolic cosines of each element of
List1.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arccosh(...).
cosh⁻¹(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode and In Rectangular
Complex Format:
Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic
cosine of squareMatrix1. This is not the
same as calculating the inverse hyperbolic
cosine of each element. For information
about the calculation method, refer to cos
() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point To see the entire result,
numbers. press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.

cot() µ key
cot(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

cot(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the cotangent of Expr1 or returns a
list of the cotangents of all elements in In Gradian angle mode:
List1.
Note: The argument is interpreted as a
degree, gradian or radian angle, according
to the current angle mode setting. You can In Radian angle mode:
use °, G, or r to override the angle mode
temporarily.

cot⁻¹() µ key
cot⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

cot⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the angle whose cotangent is
Expr1 or returns a list containing the In Gradian angle mode:
inverse cotangents of each element of
List1.

Alphabetical Listing 33
 cot⁻¹() µ key
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
gradian or radian angle, according to the In Radian angle mode:
current angle mode setting.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arccot(...).

coth() Catalog >

coth(Expr1) ⇒ expression

coth(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of Expr1
or returns a list of the hyperbolic
cotangents of all elements of List1.

coth⁻¹() Catalog >

coth⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression

coth⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of
Expr1 or returns a list containing the
inverse hyperbolic cotangents of each
element of List1.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arccoth(...).

count() Catalog >

count(Value1orList1 [,Value2orList2
[,...]]) ⇒ value
Returns the accumulated count of all
elements in the arguments that evaluate to
numeric values.
Each argument can be an expression, value,
list, or matrix. You can mix data types and
use arguments of various dimensions.
In the last example, only 1/2 and 3+4*i are
For a list, matrix, or range of cells, each counted. The remaining arguments,
element is evaluated to determine if it assuming x is undefined, do not evaluate to
should be included in the count. numeric values.

34 Alphabetical Listing
count() Catalog >
Within the Lists & Spreadsheet application,
you can use a range of cells in place of any
argument.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.

countif() Catalog >

countif(List ,Criteria) ⇒ value
Returns the accumulated count of all
elements in List that meet the specified Counts the number of elements equal to 3.
Criteria.
Criteria can be:
• A value, expression, or string. For Counts the number of elements equal to
example, 3 counts only those elements in “def.”
List that simplify to the value 3.
• A Boolean expression containing the
symbol ? as a placeholder for each
element. For example, ?<5 counts only
those elements in List that are less than
5. Counts the number of elements equal to x;
this example assumes the variable x is
Within the Lists & Spreadsheet application, undefined.
you can use a range of cells in place of List .
Empty (void) elements in the list are
ignored. For more information on empty Counts 1 and 3.
elements, see page 251.
Note: See also sumIf() , page 180, and
frequency() , page 74.

Counts 3, 5, and 7.

Counts 1, 3, 7, and 9.

Alphabetical Listing 35
 cPolyRoots() Catalog >
cPolyRoots(Poly ,Var) ⇒ list
cPolyRoots(ListOfCoeffs) ⇒ list
The first syntax, cPolyRoots( Poly ,Var) ,
returns a list of complex roots of
polynomial Poly with respect to variable
Var.
Poly must be a polynomial in one variable.
The second syntax, cPolyRoots
( ListOfCoeffs) , returns a list of complex
roots for the coefficients in ListOfCoeffs.
Note: See also polyRoots() , page 136.

crossP() Catalog >

crossP(List1, List2) ⇒ list
Returns the cross product of List1 and
List2 as a list.
List1 and List2 must have equal
dimension, and the dimension must be
either 2 or 3.
crossP(Vector1, Vector2) ⇒ vector
Returns a row or column vector (depending
on the arguments) that is the cross product
of Vector1 and Vector2.
Both Vector1 and Vector2 must be row
vectors, or both must be column vectors.
Both vectors must have equal dimension,
and the dimension must be either 2 or 3.

csc() µ key
csc(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

csc(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the cosecant of Expr1 or returns a
list containing the cosecants of all elements In Gradian angle mode:
in List1.

36 Alphabetical Listing
csc() µ key

In Radian angle mode:

csc ⁻¹() µ key

csc⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

csc⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the angle whose cosecant is Expr1
or returns a list containing the inverse In Gradian angle mode:
cosecants of each element of List1.
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
gradian or radian angle, according to the
current angle mode setting. In Radian angle mode:
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arccsc(...).

csch() Catalog >

csch(Expr1) ⇒ expression
csch(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the hyperbolic cosecant of Expr1 or
returns a list of the hyperbolic cosecants of
all elements of List1.

csch⁻¹() Catalog >

csch⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression

csch⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosecant of
Expr1 or returns a list containing the
inverse hyperbolic cosecants of each
element of List1.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arccsch(...).

Alphabetical Listing 37
 cSolve() Catalog >
cSolve(Equation, Var) ⇒ Boolean
expression
cSolve(Equation, Var=Guess) ⇒ Boolean
expression
cSolve(Inequality , Var) ⇒ Boolean
expression

Returns candidate complex solutions of an

equation or inequality for Var. The goal is
to produce candidates for all real and non-
real solutions. Even if Equation is real,
cSolve() allows non-real results in Real
result Complex Format.
Although all undefined variables that do not
end with an underscore (_) are processed
as if they were real, cSolve() can solve
polynomial equations for complex solutions.
cSolve() temporarily sets the domain to
complex during the solution even if the
current domain is real. In the complex
domain, fractional powers having odd
denominators use the principal rather than
the real branch. Consequently, solutions
from solve() to equations involving such
fractional powers are not necessarily a
subset of those from cSolve() .
cSolve() starts with exact symbolic In Display Digits mode of Fix 2:
methods. cSolve() also uses iterative
approximate complex polynomial factoring,
if necessary.
Note: See also cZeros() , solve() , and zeros() .

To see the entire result,

press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.

cSolve(Eqn1andEqn2 [and…],
VarOrGuess1, VarOrGuess2 [, … ]) ⇒
Boolean expression

38 Alphabetical Listing
cSolve() Catalog >
cSolve(SystemOfEqns, VarOrGuess1,
VarOrGuess2 [, …]) ⇒
Boolean expression
Returns candidate complex solutions to the
simultaneous algebraic equations, where
each varOrGuess specifies a variable that
you want to solve for.
Optionally, you can specify an initial guess
for a variable. Each varOrGuess must have
the form:
variable
– or –
variable = real or non-real number
For example, x is valid and so is x=3+i .
If all of the equations are polynomials and
if you do NOT specify any initial guesses,
cSolve() uses the lexical
Gröbner/Buchberger elimination method to
attempt to determine all complex solutions.
Complex solutions can include both real and
non-real solutions, as in the example to the
right.

To see the entire result,

press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.
Simultaneous polynomial equations can
have extra variables that have no values,
but represent given numeric values that
could be substituted later.

To see the entire result,

press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.
You can also include solution variables that
do not appear in the equations. These
solutions show how families of solutions
might contain arbitrary constants of the
form ck , where k is an integer suffix from 1
through 255.

Alphabetical Listing 39
 cSolve() Catalog >
For polynomial systems, computation time To see the entire result,
or memory exhaustion may depend strongly press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
on the order in which you list solution cursor.
variables. If your initial choice exhausts
memory or your patience, try rearranging
the variables in the equations and/or
varOrGuess list.
If you do not include any guesses and if any
equation is non-polynomial in any variable
but all equations are linear in all solution
variables, cSolve() uses Gaussian
elimination to attempt to determine all
solutions.
If a system is neither polynomial in all of its
variables nor linear in its solution variables,
cSolve() determines at most one solution
using an approximate iterative method. To
do so, the number of solution variables
must equal the number of equations, and
all other variables in the equations must
simplify to numbers.
A non-real guess is often necessary to
determine a non-real solution. For
convergence, a guess might have to be
rather close to a solution.
To see the entire result,
press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.

CubicReg Catalog >

CubicReg X, Y[, [Freq] [, Category ,
Include ]]
Computes the cubic polynomial regression
y=a•x3+b•x2+c•x+d on lists X and Y with
frequency Freq. A summary of results is
stored in the stat.results variable. (See page
176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.

40 Alphabetical Listing
CubicReg Catalog >
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a•x 3+b•x 2+c•x+d

stat.a, stat.b, Regression coefficients

stat.c, stat.d

stat.R 2 Coefficient of determination

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

cumulativeSum() Catalog >

cumulativeSum(List1) ⇒ list
Returns a list of the cumulative sums of the
elements in List1, starting at element 1.

Alphabetical Listing 41
 cumulativeSum() Catalog >
cumulativeSum(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix of the cumulative sums of
the elements in Matrix1. Each element is
the cumulative sum of the column from top
to bottom.
An empty (void) element in List1 or
Matrix1 produces a void element in the
resulting list or matrix. For more
information on empty elements, see page
251.

Cycle Catalog >

Cycle Function listing that sums the integers from 1
to 100 skipping 50.
Transfers control immediately to the next
iteration of the current loop ( For, While, or
Loop).
Cycle is not allowed outside the three
looping structures ( For, While, or Loop).
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

►Cylind Catalog >

Vector ►Cylind
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>Cylind.
Displays the row or column vector in
cylindrical form [r,∠ θ, z].
Vector must have exactly three elements.
It can be either a row or a column.

42 Alphabetical Listing
cZeros() Catalog >
cZeros(Expr, Var) ⇒ list In Display Digits mode of Fix 3:

Returns a list of candidate real and non-real

values of Var that make Expr=0. cZeros()
does this by computing
exp►list(cSolve( Expr=0,Var) ,Var) .
To see the entire result,
Otherwise, cZeros() is similar to zeros() .
press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
Note: See also cSolve() , solve() , and zeros() . cursor.

cZeros({Expr1, Expr2[, … ] },
{VarOrGuess1,VarOrGuess2[, … ] })
⇒ matrix
Returns candidate positions where the
expressions are zero simultaneously. Each
VarOrGuess specifies an unknown whose
value you seek.
Optionally, you can specify an initial guess
for a variable. Each VarOrGuess must have
the form:
variable
– or –
variable = real or non-real number
For example, x is valid and so is x=3+i .
If all of the expressions are polynomials and
you do NOT specify any initial guesses,
cZeros() uses the lexical
Gröbner/Buchberger elimination method to
attempt to determine all complex zeros.
Complex zeros can include both real and
non-real zeros, as in the example to the
right.
Each row of the resulting matrix represents
an alternate zero, with the components
ordered the same as the VarOrGuess list.
To extract a row, index the matrix by [row].
Extract row 2:

Alphabetical Listing 43
 cZeros() Catalog >
Simultaneous polynomials can have extra
variables that have no values, but represent
given numeric values that could be
substituted later.
You can also include unknown variables that
do not appear in the expressions. These
zeros show how families of zeros might
contain arbitrary constants of the form ck ,
where k is an integer suffix from 1 through
255.
For polynomial systems, computation time
or memory exhaustion may depend strongly
on the order in which you list unknowns. If
your initial choice exhausts memory or your
patience, try rearranging the variables in
the expressions and/or VarOrGuess list.
If you do not include any guesses and if any
expression is non-polynomial in any variable
but all expressions are linear in all
unknowns, cZeros() uses Gaussian
elimination to attempt to determine all
zeros.
If a system is neither polynomial in all of its
variables nor linear in its unknowns, cZeros
() determines at most one zero using an
approximate iterative method. To do so, the
number of unknowns must equal the
number of expressions, and all other
variables in the expressions must simplify
to numbers.
A non-real guess is often necessary to
determine a non-real zero. For
convergence, a guess might have to be
rather close to a zero.

dbd() Catalog >

dbd(date1,date2) ⇒ value
Returns the number of days between date1
and date2 using the actual-day-count
method.

44 Alphabetical Listing
dbd() Catalog >
date1 and date2 can be numbers or lists of
numbers within the range of the dates on
the standard calendar. If both date1 and
date2 are lists, they must be the same
length.
date1 and date2 must be between the
years 1950 through 2049.
You can enter the dates in either of two
formats. The decimal placement
differentiates between the date formats.
MM.DDYY (format used commonly in the
United States)
DDMM.YY (format use commonly in
Europe)

►DD Catalog >

Expr1 ►DD ⇒ valueList1 In Degree angle mode:
►DD ⇒ listMatrix1
►DD ⇒ matrix
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>DD.
Returns the decimal equivalent of the
argument expressed in degrees. The
argument is a number, list, or matrix that is In Gradian angle mode:
interpreted by the Angle mode setting in
gradians, radians or degrees.

In Radian angle mode:

►Decimal Catalog >

Expression1 ►Decimal ⇒ expression
List1 ►Decimal ⇒ expression
Matrix1 ►Decimal ⇒ expression
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>Decimal.

Alphabetical Listing 45
 ►Decimal Catalog >
Displays the argument in decimal form.
This operator can be used only at the end of
the entry line.

Define Catalog >

Define Var = Expression
Define Function(Param1, Param2, ...) =
Expression
Defines the variable Var or the user-
defined function Function.
Parameters, such as Param1, provide
placeholders for passing arguments to the
function. When calling a user-defined
function, you must supply arguments (for
example, values or variables) that
correspond to the parameters. When called,
the function evaluates Expression using
the supplied arguments.
Var and Function cannot be the name of a
system variable or built-in function or
command.
Note: This form of Define is equivalent to
executing the expression: expression →
Function(Param1,Param2).
Define Function(Param1, Param2, ...) =
Func
     Block
EndFunc

Define Program(Param1, Param2, ...) =

Prgm
     Block
EndPrgm
In this form, the user-defined function or
program can execute a block of multiple
statements.
Block can be either a single statement or a
series of statements on separate lines.
Block also can include expressions and
instructions (such as If , Then, Else, and For).

46 Alphabetical Listing
Define Catalog >
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.
Note: See also Define LibPriv, page 47, and
Define LibPub, page 47.

Define LibPriv Catalog >

Define LibPriv Var = Expression
Define LibPriv Function(Param1, Param2,
...) = Expression
Define LibPriv Function(Param1, Param2,
...) = Func
     Block
EndFunc
Define LibPriv Program(Param1, Param2,
...) = Prgm
     Block
EndPrgm
Operates the same as Define, except defines
a private library variable, function, or
program. Private functions and programs do
not appear in the Catalog.
Note: See also Define, page 46, and Define
LibPub, page 47.

Define LibPub Catalog >

Define LibPub Var = Expression
Define LibPub Function(Param1, Param2,
...) = Expression
Define LibPub Function(Param1, Param2,
...) = Func
     Block
EndFunc

Alphabetical Listing 47
 Define LibPub Catalog >
Define LibPub Program(Param1, Param2,
...) = Prgm
     Block
EndPrgm
Operates the same as Define, except defines
a public library variable, function, or
program. Public functions and programs
appear in the Catalog after the library has
been saved and refreshed.
Note: See also Define, page 46, and Define
LibPriv, page 47.

deltaList() See ΔList(), page 103.

deltaTmpCnv() See ΔtmpCnv(), page 189.

DelVar Catalog >

DelVar Var1[, Var2] [, Var3] ...
DelVar Var.
Deletes the specified variable or variable
group from memory.
If one or more of the variables are locked,
this command displays an error message
and deletes only the unlocked variables. See
unLock, page 197.
DelVar Var. deletes all members of the
Var. variable group (such as the statistics
stat .nn results or variables created using
the LibShortcut() function) . The dot ( .) in
this form of the DelVar command limits it
to deleting a variable group; the simple
variable Var is not affected.

48 Alphabetical Listing
delVoid() Catalog >
delVoid(List1) ⇒ list
Returns a list that has the contents of List1
with all empty (void) elements removed.
For more information on empty elements,
see page 251.

derivative() See d(), page 221.

deSolve() Catalog >

deSolve(1stOr2ndOrderODE, Var,
depVar) ⇒ a general solution
Returns an equation that explicitly or
implicitly specifies a general solution to the
1st- or 2nd-order ordinary differential
equation (ODE). In the ODE:

• Use a prime symbol (press º) to denote

the 1st derivative of the dependent
variable with respect to the independent
variable.
• Use two prime symbols to denote the
corresponding second derivative.
The prime symbol is used for derivatives
within deSolve() only. In other cases, use d
() .
The general solution of a 1st-order equation
contains an arbitrary constant of the form
ck , where k is an integer suffix from 1
through 255. The solution of a 2nd-order
equation contains two such constants.
Apply solve() to an implicit solution if you
want to try to convert it to one or more
equivalent explicit solutions.
When comparing your results with textbook
or manual solutions, be aware that different
methods introduce arbitrary constants at
different points in the calculation, which
may produce different general solutions.

Alphabetical Listing 49
 deSolve() Catalog >
deSolve(1stOrderODE and initCond, Var,
depVar) ⇒ a particular solution
Returns a particular solution that satisfies
1stOrderODE and initCond. This is usually
easier than determining a general solution,
substituting initial values, solving for the
arbitrary constant, and then substituting
that value into the general solution.
initCond is an equation of the form:
depVar (initialIndependentValue ) =
initialDependentValue
The initialIndependentValue and
initialDependentValue can be variables
such as x0 and y0 that have no stored
values. Implicit differentiation can help
verify implicit solutions.
deSolve(2ndOrderODE and initCond1 and
initCond2, Var, depVar)
⇒ particular solution
Returns a particular solution that satisfies
2nd Order ODE and has a specified value
of the dependent variable and its first
derivative at one point.
For initCond1, use the form:
depVar (initialIndependentValue ) =
initialDependentValue
For initCond2, use the form:
depVar (initialIndependentValue ) =
initial1stDerivativeValue
deSolve(2ndOrderODE and bndCond1 and
bndCond2, Var, depVar)
⇒ a particular solution
Returns a particular solution that satisfies
2ndOrderODE and has specified values at
two different points.

50 Alphabetical Listing
deSolve() Catalog >

det() Catalog >

det(squareMatrix [, Tolerance ]) ⇒
expression
Returns the determinant of squareMatrix .
Optionally, any matrix element is treated as
zero if its absolute value is less than
Tolerance . This tolerance is used only if the
matrix has floating-point entries and does
not contain any symbolic variables that
have not been assigned a value. Otherwise,
Tolerance is ignored.
• If you use /· or set the Auto or
Approximate mode to Approximate,
computations are done using floating-
point arithmetic.
• If Tolerance is omitted or not used, the
default tolerance is calculated as:
5E ⁻14 •max(dim( squareMatrix ))
•rowNorm( squareMatrix )

diag() Catalog >

diag(List ) ⇒ matrix
diag(rowMatrix ) ⇒ matrix
diag(columnMatrix ) ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix with the values in the
argument list or matrix in its main
diagonal.
diag(squareMatrix ) ⇒ rowMatrix
Returns a row matrix containing the
elements from the main diagonal of
squareMatrix .
squareMatrix must be square.

Alphabetical Listing 51
 dim() Catalog >
dim(List ) ⇒ integer
Returns the dimension of List .
dim(Matrix ) ⇒ list
Returns the dimensions of matrix as a two-
element list {rows, columns}.
dim(String) ⇒ integer
Returns the number of characters contained
in character string String.

Disp  Catalog >

Disp exprOrString1 [, exprOrString2] ...
Displays the arguments in the Calculator
history. The arguments are displayed in
succession, with thin spaces as separators.
Useful mainly in programs and functions to
ensure the display of intermediate
calculations.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

DispAt Catalog >

DispAt int ,expr1 [,expr2 ...] ...
DispAt allows you to specify the line Example
where the specified expression or string
will be displayed on the screen.
The line number can be specified as an
expression.
Please note that the line number is not
for the entire screen but for the area
immediately following the
command/program.

52 Alphabetical Listing
DispAt Catalog >
This command allows dashboard-like
output from programs where the value
of an expression or from a sensor
reading is updated on the same line.
DispAtand Disp can be used within the
same program.
Note: The maximum number is set to 8
since that matches a screen-full of lines
on the handheld screen - as long as the
lines don't have 2D math expressions.
The exact number of lines depends on
the content of the displayed
information. Illustrative examples:
Define z()= Output
Prgm z()
For n,1,3 Iteration 1:
DispAt 1,"N: ",n Line 1: N:1
Disp "Hello" Line 2: Hello
EndFor
EndPrgm Iteration 2:
Line 1: N:2
Line 2: Hello
Line 3: Hello

Iteration 3:
Line 1: N:3
Line 2: Hello
Line 3: Hello
Line 4: Hello
Define z1()= z1()
Prgm Line 1: N:3
For n,1,3 Line 2: Hello
DispAt 1,"N: ",n Line 3: Hello
EndFor Line 4: Hello
Line 5: Hello
For n,1,4
Disp "Hello"
EndFor
EndPrgm

Alphabetical Listing 53
 DispAt Catalog >

Error conditions:

Error Message Description

DispAt line number must be between 1 and 8 Expression evaluates the line number
outside the range 1-8 (inclusive)
Too few arguments The function or command is missing one
or more arguments.
No arguments Same as current 'syntax error' dialog
Too many arguments Limit argument. Same error as Disp.
Invalid data type First argument must be a number.
Void: DispAt void "Hello World" Datatype error is thrown
for the void (if the callback is defined)
Conversion operator: DispAt 2_ft @> _m, CAS: Datatype Error is thrown (if the
"Hello World" callback is defined)
Numeric: Conversion will be evaluated
and if the result is a valid argument,
DispAt print the string at the result line.

►DMS Catalog >

Expr ►DMS In Degree angle mode:

List ►DMS
Matrix ►DMS

Note: You can insert this operator from the

computer keyboard by typing @>DMS.
Interprets the argument as an angle and
displays the equivalent DMS
(DDDDDD°MM'SS.ss'') number. See °, ', ''
on page 228 for DMS (degree, minutes,
seconds) format.
Note: ►DMS will convert from radians to
degrees when used in radian mode. If the
input is followed by a degree symbol ° , no
conversion will occur. You can use ►DMS
only at the end of an entry line.

54 Alphabetical Listing
domain() Catalog >
domain(Expr1, Var) ⇒ expression
Returns the domain of Expr1 with respect
to Var.
domain() can be used to examine domains
of functions. It is restricted to real and finite
domain.
This functionality has limitations due to
shortcomings of computer algebra
simplification and solver algorithms.
Certain functions cannot be used as
arguments for domain() , regardless of
whether they appear explicitly or within
user-defined variables and functions. In the
following example, the expression cannot
be simplified because ∫() is a disallowed
function.

dominantTerm() Catalog >

dominantTerm(Expr1, Var [, Point ]) ⇒
expression
dominantTerm(Expr1, Var [, Point ]) |
Var>Point ⇒ expression
dominantTerm(Expr1, Var [, Point ]) |
Var<Point ⇒ expression

Alphabetical Listing 55
 dominantTerm() Catalog >
Returns the dominant term of a power
series representation of Expr1 expanded
about Point . The dominant term is the one
whose magnitude grows most rapidly near
Var = Point . The resulting power of (Var −
Point ) can have a negative and/or
fractional exponent. The coefficient of this
power can include logarithms of ( Var −
Point ) and other functions of Var that are
dominated by all powers of ( Var − Point )
having the same exponent sign.
Point defaults to 0. Point can be ∞ or −∞,
in which cases the dominant term will be
the term having the largest exponent of
Var rather than the smallest exponent of
Var.
dominantTerm(…) returns “dominantTerm
(…) ” if it is unable to determine such a
representation, such as for essential
singularities such as sin(1/ z) at z=0, e−1/z
at z=0, or ez at z = ∞ or −∞.
If the series or one of its derivatives has a
jump discontinuity at Point , the result is
likely to contain sub-expressions of the
form sign(…) or abs(…) for a real expansion
variable or (-1) floor(…angle(…)…) for a complex
expansion variable, which is one ending
with “_”. If you intend to use the dominant
term only for values on one side of Point ,
then append to dominantTerm( ...) the
appropriate one of “| Var > Point ”, “| Var
< Point ”, “| “Var ≥ Point ”, or “Var ≤
Point ” to obtain a simpler result.
dominantTerm() distributes over 1st-
argument lists and matrices.
dominantTerm() is useful when you want to
know the simplest possible expression that
is asymptotic to another expression as
Var→Point . dominantTerm() is also useful
when it isn’t obvious what the degree of
the first non-zero term of a series will be,
and you don’t want to iteratively guess
either interactively or by a program loop.

56 Alphabetical Listing
 dominantTerm() Catalog >
Note: See also series() , page 161.

dotP() Catalog >

dotP(List1, List2) ⇒ expression
Returns the “dot” product of two lists.
dotP(Vector1, Vector2) ⇒ expression
Returns the “dot” product of two vectors.
Both must be row vectors, or both must be
column vectors.

See Also: TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

e^() u key
e ^(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns e raised to the Expr1 power.
Note: See also e exponent template, page
2.

Note: Pressing u to display e^( is different

from pressing the character E on the
keyboard.
You can enter a complex number in reiθ
polar form. However, use this form in
Radian angle mode only; it causes a
Domain error in Degree or Gradian angle
mode.
e ^(List1) ⇒ list
Returns e raised to the power of each
element in List1.
e ^(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix

Alphabetical Listing 57
 e^() u key
Returns the matrix exponential of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating e raised to the power of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

eff() Catalog >

eff(nominalRate,CpY) ⇒ value
Financial function that converts the nominal
interest rate nominalRate to an annual
effective rate, given CpY as the number of
compounding periods per year.
nominalRate must be a real number, and
CpY must be a real number > 0.
Note: See also nom() , page 123.

eigVc() Catalog >

eigVc(squareMatrix ) ⇒ matrix In Rectangular Complex Format:

Returns a matrix containing the

eigenvectors for a real or complex
squareMatrix , where each column in the
result corresponds to an eigenvalue. Note
that an eigenvector is not unique; it may be
scaled by any constant factor. The
eigenvectors are normalized, meaning that:
if V = [x1 , x2 , … , xn ]
To see the entire result,
then x1 2 + x2 2 + … + xn 2 = 1 press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.
squareMatrix is first balanced with
similarity transformations until the row and
column norms are as close to the same
value as possible. The squareMatrix is then
reduced to upper Hessenberg form and the
eigenvectors are computed via a Schur
factorization.

58 Alphabetical Listing
eigVl() Catalog >
eigVl(squareMatrix ) ⇒ list In Rectangular complex format mode:

Returns a list of the eigenvalues of a real or

complex squareMatrix .
squareMatrix is first balanced with
similarity transformations until the row and
column norms are as close to the same
value as possible. The squareMatrix is then
reduced to upper Hessenberg form and the To see the entire result,
eigenvalues are computed from the upper press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
Hessenberg matrix. cursor.

Else See If, page 86.

ElseIf Catalog >

If BooleanExpr1 Then
     Block1
ElseIf BooleanExpr2 Then
     Block2
⋮
ElseIf BooleanExprN Then
     BlockN
EndIf
⋮
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

EndFor See For, page 72.

EndFunc See Func, page 75.

Alphabetical Listing 59
 EndIf See If, page 86.

EndLoop See Loop, page 110.

EndPrgm See Prgm, page 137.

EndTry See Try, page 191.

EndWhile See While, page 201.

euler () Catalog >

euler(Expr, Var, depVar, {Var0, VarMax }, Differential equation:
depVar0, VarStep [, eulerStep]) ⇒ matrix y'=0.001*y*(100-y) and y(0)=10

euler(SystemOfExpr, Var, ListOfDepVars,

{Var0, VarMax },      ListOfDepVars0,
VarStep [, eulerStep]) ⇒ matrix
euler(ListOfExpr, Var, ListOfDepVars, To see the entire result,
{Var0, VarMax }, ListOfDepVars0, press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
VarStep [, eulerStep]) ⇒ matrix cursor.

Uses the Euler method to solve the system Compare above result with CAS exact
solution obtained using deSolve() and
seqGen():
with depVar( Var0)=depVar0 on the
interval [Var0,VarMax ]. Returns a matrix
whose first row defines the Var output
values and whose second row defines the
value of the first solution component at the
corresponding Var values, and so on.
Expr is the right-hand side that defines the
ordinary differential equation (ODE).

60 Alphabetical Listing
euler () Catalog >
SystemOfExpr is the system of right-hand
sides that define the system of ODEs
(corresponds to order of dependent
variables in ListOfDepVars).
ListOfExpr is a list of right-hand sides that
define the system of ODEs (corresponds to
the order of dependent variables in
ListOfDepVars).
Var is the independent variable.
ListOfDepVars is a list of dependent
variables. System of equations:

{Var0, VarMax } is a two-element list that

tells the function to integrate from Var0 to
VarMax . with y1 (0)=2 and y2 (0)=5

ListOfDepVars0 is a list of initial values

for dependent variables.
VarStep is a nonzero number such that sign
( VarStep) = sign( VarMax -Var0) and
solutions are returned at Var0+i•VarStep
for all i =0,1,2,… such that Var0+i•VarStep
is in [var0,VarMax ] (there may not be a
solution value at VarMax ).
eulerStep is a positive integer (defaults to
1) that defines the number of euler steps
between output values. The actual step size
used by the euler method is
VarStep ⁄ eulerStep.

eval () Hub Menu

eval(Expr) ⇒ string Set the blue element of the RGB LED to half
intensity.
eval() is valid only in the TI-Innovator™ Hub
Command argument of programming
commands Get, GetStr, and Send. The
software evaluates expression Expr and
replaces the eval() statement with the
result as a character string. Reset the blue element to OFF.

The argument Expr must simplify to a real

number.
eval() argument must simplify to a real
number.

Alphabetical Listing 61
 eval () Hub Menu

Program to fade-in the red element

Execute the program.

Although eval() does not display its result,

you can view the resulting Hub command
string after executing the command by
inspecting any of the following special
variables.
iostr.SendAns
iostr.GetAns
iostr.GetStrAns
Note: See also Get  (page 77), GetStr  (page
84), and Send  (page 158).

exact() Catalog >

exact(Expr1 [, Tolerance ]) ⇒ expression
exact(List1 [, Tolerance ]) ⇒ list
exact(Matrix1 [, Tolerance ]) ⇒ matrix
Uses Exact mode arithmetic to return,
when possible, the rational-number
equivalent of the argument.
Tolerance specifies the tolerance for the
conversion; the default is 0 (zero).

62 Alphabetical Listing
Exit Catalog >
Exit Function listing:

Exits the current For, While, or Loop block.

Exit is not allowed outside the three looping
structures ( For, While, or Loop).
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

►exp Catalog >

Expr►exp
Represents Expr in terms of the natural
exponential e . This is a display conversion
operator. It can be used only at the end of
the entry line.
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>exp.

exp() u key
exp(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns e raised to the Expr1 power.
Note: See also e exponent template, page
2.
You can enter a complex number in reiθ
polar form. However, use this form in
Radian angle mode only; it causes a
Domain error in Degree or Gradian angle
mode.
exp(List1) ⇒ list
Returns e raised to the power of each
element in List1.

Alphabetical Listing 63
 exp() u key
exp(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix
Returns the matrix exponential of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating e raised to the power of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

exp►list() Catalog >

exp►list(Expr,Var) ⇒ list
Examines Expr for equations that are
separated by the word “or,” and returns a
list containing the right-hand sides of the
equations of the form Var=Expr. This
gives you an easy way to extract some
solution values embedded in the results of
the solve() , cSolve() , fMin() , and fMax()
functions.
Note: exp►list() is not necessary with the
zeros() and cZeros() functions because they
return a list of solution values directly.
You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing exp@>list(...).

expand() Catalog >

expand(Expr1 [, Var]) ⇒ expression
expand(List1 [,Var]) ⇒ list
expand(Matrix1 [,Var]) ⇒ matrix
expand( Expr1) returns Expr1 expanded
with respect to all its variables. The
expansion is polynomial expansion for
polynomials and partial fraction expansion
for rational expressions.
The goal of expand() is to transform Expr1
into a sum and/or difference of simple
terms. In contrast, the goal of factor() is to
transform Expr1 into a product and/or
quotient of simple factors.

64 Alphabetical Listing
expand() Catalog >
expand( Expr1,Var) returns Expr1
expanded with respect to Var. Similar
powers of Var are collected. The terms and
their factors are sorted with Var as the
main variable. There might be some
incidental factoring or expansion of the
collected coefficients. Compared to
omitting Var, this often saves time,
memory, and screen space, while making
the expression more comprehensible.

Even when there is only one variable, using

Var might make the denominator
factorization used for partial fraction
expansion more complete.
Hint: For rational expressions, propFrac() is
a faster but less extreme alternative to
expand() .
Note: See also comDenom() for an
expanded numerator over an expanded
denominator.
expand( Expr1,[Var]) also distributes
logarithms and fractional powers
regardless of Var. For increased
distribution of logarithms and fractional
powers, inequality constraints might be
necessary to guarantee that some factors
are nonnegative.
expand( Expr1, [Var]) also distributes
absolute values, sign() , and exponentials,
regardless of Var.
Note: See also tExpand() for trigonometric
angle-sum and multiple-angle expansion.

expr() Catalog >

expr(String) ⇒ expression
Returns the character string contained in
String as an expression and immediately
executes it.

Alphabetical Listing 65
 ExpReg Catalog >
ExpReg X, Y [, [Freq] [, Category,
Include ]]
Computes the exponential regression y = a•
(b) x on lists X and Y with frequency Freq. A
summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a•(b)x

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.r 2 Coefficient of linear determination for transformed data

stat.r Correlation coefficient for transformed data (x, ln(y))

stat.Resid Residuals associated with the exponential model

stat.ResidTrans Residuals associated with linear fit of transformed data

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

66 Alphabetical Listing
Output
Description
variable
stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

factor() Catalog >

factor(Expr1[, Var]) ⇒ expression
factor(List1[,Var]) ⇒ list
factor(Matrix1[,Var]) ⇒ matrix
factor( Expr1) returns Expr1 factored with
respect to all of its variables over a
common denominator.
Expr1 is factored as much as possible
toward linear rational factors without
introducing new non-real subexpressions.
This alternative is appropriate if you want
factorization with respect to more than one
variable.
factor( Expr1,Var) returns Expr1 factored
with respect to variable Var.
Expr1 is factored as much as possible
toward real factors that are linear in Var,
even if it introduces irrational constants or
subexpressions that are irrational in other
variables.
The factors and their terms are sorted with
Var as the main variable. Similar powers of
Var are collected in each factor. Include
Var if factorization is needed with respect
to only that variable and you are willing to
accept irrational expressions in any other
variables to increase factorization with
respect to Var. There might be some
incidental factoring with respect to other
variables.
For the Auto setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode, including Var permits
approximation with floating-point
coefficients where irrational coefficients
cannot be explicitly expressed concisely in
terms of the built-in functions. Even when
there is only one variable, including Var
might yield more complete factorization.

Alphabetical Listing 67
 factor() Catalog >
Note: See also comDenom() for a fast way
to achieve partial factoring when factor() is
not fast enough or if it exhausts memory.
Note: See also cFactor() for factoring all the
way to complex coefficients in pursuit of
linear factors.
factor( rationalNumber) returns the rational
number factored into primes. For
composite numbers, the computing time
grows exponentially with the number of
digits in the second-largest factor. For
example, factoring a 30-digit integer could
take more than a day, and factoring a 100-
digit number could take more than a
century.
To stop a calculation manually,

• Handheld: Hold down the c key and

press · repeatedly.
• Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• Macintosh®: Hold down the F5 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• iPad®: The app displays a prompt. You
can continue waiting or cancel.
If you merely want to determine if a
number is prime, use isPrime() instead. It is
much faster, particularly if rationalNumber
is not prime and if the second-largest factor
has more than five digits.

FCdf() Catalog >

FCdf
(lowBound,upBound,dfNumer,dfDenom) ⇒
number if lowBound and upBound are
numbers, list if lowBound and upBound are
lists
FCdf
(lowBound,upBound,dfNumer,dfDenom) ⇒
number if lowBound and upBound are
numbers, list if lowBound and upBound are
lists

68 Alphabetical Listing
FCdf() Catalog >
Computes the F distribution probability
between lowBound and upBound for the
specified dfNumer (degrees of freedom) and
dfDenom.
For P( X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = 0.

Fill Catalog >

Fill Expr, matrixVar ⇒ matrix
Replaces each element in variable
matrixVar with Expr.
matrixVar must already exist.

Fill Expr, listVar ⇒ list

Replaces each element in variable listVar
with Expr.
listVar must already exist.

FiveNumSummary Catalog >

FiveNumSummary X[,[Freq]
[,Category ,Include ]]
Provides an abbreviated version of the 1-
variable statistics on list X. A summary of
results is stored in the stat.results variable.
(See page 176.)
X represents a list containing the data.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1.
Category is a list of numeric category codes
for the corresponding X data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.

Alphabetical Listing 69
 FiveNumSummary Catalog >
An empty (void) element in any of the lists
X, Freq, or Category results in a void for
the corresponding element of all those lists.
For more information on empty elements,
see page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.MinX Minimum of x values.

stat.Q X 1st Quartile of x.

1
stat.MedianX Median of x.

stat.Q X 3rd Quartile of x.

3
stat.MaxX Maximum of x values.

floor() Catalog >

floor(Expr1) ⇒ integer
Returns the greatest integer that is ≤ the
argument. This function is identical to int() .
The argument can be a real or a complex
number.
floor(List1) ⇒ list
floor(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a list or matrix of the floor of each
element.
Note: See also ceiling() and int() .

fMax() Catalog >

fMax(Expr, Var) ⇒ Boolean expression
fMax(Expr, Var,lowBound)
fMax(Expr, Var,lowBound,upBound)
fMax(Expr, Var) |
lowBound≤Var≤upBound
Returns a Boolean expression specifying
candidate values of Var that maximize
Expr or locate its least upper bound.

70 Alphabetical Listing
fMax() Catalog >
You can use the constraint (“|”) operator to
restrict the solution interval and/or specify
other constraints.
For the Approximate setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode, fMax() iteratively
searches for one approximate local
maximum. This is often faster, particularly
if you use the “|” operator to constrain the
search to a relatively small interval that
contains exactly one local maximum.
Note: See also fMin() and max() .

fMin() Catalog >

fMin(Expr, Var) ⇒ Boolean expression
fMin(Expr, Var,lowBound)
fMin(Expr, Var,lowBound,upBound)
fMin(Expr, Var) |
lowBound≤Var≤upBound
Returns a Boolean expression specifying
candidate values of Var that minimize
Expr or locate its greatest lower bound.
You can use the constraint (“|”) operator to
restrict the solution interval and/or specify
other constraints.
For the Approximate setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode, fMin() iteratively
searches for one approximate local
minimum. This is often faster, particularly
if you use the “|” operator to constrain the
search to a relatively small interval that
contains exactly one local minimum.
Note: See also fMax() and min() .

Alphabetical Listing 71
 For Catalog >
For Var, Low, High [, Step]
     Block
EndFor
Executes the statements in Block
iteratively for each value of Var, from Low
to High, in increments of Step.
Var must not be a system variable.
Step can be positive or negative. The
default value is 1.
Block can be either a single statement or a
series of statements separated with the “:”
character.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

format() Catalog >

format(Expr[, formatString]) ⇒ string
Returns Expr as a character string based on
the format template.
Expr must simplify to a number.
formatString is a string and must be in the
form: “F[n]”, “S[n]”, “E[n]”, “G[n][c]”,
where [ ] indicate optional portions.
F[n]: Fixed format. n is the number of digits
to display after the decimal point.
S[n]: Scientific format. n is the number of
digits to display after the decimal point.
E[n]: Engineering format. n is the number
of digits after the first significant digit. The
exponent is adjusted to a multiple of three,
and the decimal point is moved to the right
by zero, one, or two digits.

72 Alphabetical Listing
format() Catalog >
G[n][c]: Same as fixed format but also
separates digits to the left of the radix into
groups of three. c specifies the group
separator character and defaults to a
comma. If c is a period, the radix will be
shown as a comma.
[Rc]: Any of the above specifiers may be
suffixed with the Rc radix flag, where c is a
single character that specifies what to
substitute for the radix point.

fPart() Catalog >

fPart(Expr1) ⇒ expression
fPart(List1) ⇒ list
fPart(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns the fractional part of the argument.
For a list or matrix, returns the fractional
parts of the elements.
The argument can be a real or a complex
number.

FPdf() Catalog >

FPdf(XVal ,dfNumer,dfDenom) ⇒ number
if XVal is a number, list if XVal is a list
Computes the F distribution probability at
XVal for the specified dfNumer (degrees of
freedom) and dfDenom.

freqTable►list() Catalog >

freqTable►list(List1,freqIntegerList ) ⇒
list
Returns a list containing the elements from
List1 expanded according to the
frequencies in freqIntegerList . This
function can be used for building a
frequency table for the Data & Statistics
application.
List1 can be any valid list.

Alphabetical Listing 73
 freqTable►list() Catalog >
freqIntegerList must have the same
dimension as List1 and must contain non-
negative integer elements only. Each
element specifies the number of times the
corresponding List1 element will be
repeated in the result list. A value of zero
excludes the corresponding List1 element.
Note: You can insert this function from the
computer keyboard by typing
freqTable@>list(...).
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.

frequency() Catalog >

frequency(List1,binsList ) ⇒ list
Returns a list containing counts of the
elements in List1. The counts are based on
ranges (bins) that you define in binsList .
If binsList is {b(1), b(2), …, b(n)}, the
specified ranges are {?≤b(1), b(1)<?≤b Explanation of result:
(2),…,b(n-1)<?≤b(n), b(n)>?}. The resulting
2 elements from Datalist are ≤2.5
list is one element longer than binsList .
4 elements from Datalist are >2.5 and ≤4.5
Each element of the result corresponds to
the number of elements from List1 that 3 elements from Datalist are >4.5
are in the range of that bin. Expressed in
terms of the countIf() function, the result is The element “hello” is a string and cannot be
{ countIf(list, ?≤b(1)), countIf(list, b(1)<?≤b placed in any of the defined bins.
(2)), …, countIf(list, b(n-1)<?≤b(n)), countIf
(list, b(n)>?)}.
Elements of List1 that cannot be “placed in
a bin” are ignored. Empty (void) elements
are also ignored. For more information on
empty elements, see page 251.
Within the Lists & Spreadsheet application,
you can use a range of cells in place of both
arguments.
Note: See also countIf() , page 35.

74 Alphabetical Listing
FTest_2Samp Catalog >
FTest_2Samp List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2
[,Hypoth]]]
FTest_2Samp List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2
[,Hypoth]]]
(Data list input)
FTest_2Samp sx1,n1,sx2,n2[,Hypoth]
FTest_2Samp sx1,n1,sx2,n2[,Hypoth]
(Summary stats input)
Performs a two-sample F test. A summary
of results is stored in the stat.results
variable. (See page 176.)
For H : σ1 > σ2, set Hypoth>0
a
For H : σ1 ≠ σ2 (default), set Hypoth =0
a
For H : σ1 < σ2, set Hypoth<0
a
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see Empty (Void)
Elements, page 251.

Output variable Description

stat. F Calculated F statistic for the data sequence

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.dfNumer numerator degrees of freedom = n1-1

stat.dfDenom denominator degrees of freedom = n2-1

stat.sx1, stat.sx2 Sample standard deviations of the data sequences in List 1 and List 2

stat.x1_bar Sample means of the data sequences in List 1 and List 2

stat.x2_bar

stat.n1, stat.n2 Size of the samples

Func Catalog >

Func Define a piecewise function:
     Block
EndFunc
Template for creating a user-defined
function.

Alphabetical Listing 75
 Func Catalog >
Block can be a single statement, a series
of statements separated with the “:”
character, or a series of statements on
separate lines. The function can use the
Return instruction to return a specific result.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Result of graphing g(x)
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

gcd() Catalog >

gcd(Number1, Number2) ⇒ expression
Returns the greatest common divisor of the
two arguments. The gcd of two fractions is
the gcd of their numerators divided by the
lcm of their denominators.
In Auto or Approximate mode, the gcd of
fractional floating-point numbers is 1.0.
gcd(List1, List2) ⇒ list
Returns the greatest common divisors of
the corresponding elements in List1 and
List2.
gcd(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns the greatest common divisors of
the corresponding elements in Matrix1 and
Matrix2.

geomCdf() Catalog >

geomCdf(p,lowBound,upBound) ⇒ number

76 Alphabetical Listing
geomCdf() Catalog >
if lowBound and upBound are numbers, list
if lowBound and upBound are lists
geomCdf(p,upBound)for P(1≤X≤upBound)
⇒ number if upBound is a number, list if
upBound is a list
Computes a cumulative geometric
probability from lowBound to upBound with
the specified probability of success p.
For P(X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = 1.

geomPdf() Catalog >

geomPdf(p,XVal ) ⇒ number if XVal is a
number, list if XVal is a list
Computes a probability at XVal , the number
of the trial on which the first success occurs,
for the discrete geometric distribution with
the specified probability of success p.

Get Hub Menu

Get [promptString,] var[, statusVar] Example: Request the current value of the
hub's built-in light-level sensor. Use Get to
Get [promptString,] func (arg1, ...argn) retrieve the value and assign it to variable
[, statusVar] lightval.
Programming command: Retrieves a value
from a connected TI-Innovator™ Hub and
assigns the value to variable var.
The value must be requested:
• In advance, through a Send "READ ..."
Embed the READ request within the Get
command.
command.
— or —
• By embedding a "READ ..." request as
the optional promptString argument.
This method lets you use a single
command to request the value and
retrieve it.

Alphabetical Listing 77
 Get Hub Menu
Implicit simplification takes place. For
example, a received string of "123" is
interpreted as a numeric value. To preserve
the string, use GetStr instead of Get.
If you include the optional argument
statusVar, it is assigned a value based on
the success of the operation. A value of
zero means that no data was received.
In the second syntax, the func () argument
allows a program to store the received
string as a function definition. This syntax
operates as if the program executed the
command:
     Define func ( arg1, ...argn) = received
string
The program can then use the defined
function func ().
Note: You can use the Get command within
a user-defined program but not within a
function.
Note: See also GetStr, page 84 and Send,
page 158.

getDenom() Catalog >

getDenom(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Transforms the argument into an
expression having a reduced common
denominator, and then returns its
denominator.

getKey() Catalog >

getKey([0|1]) ⇒ returnString
Description:getKey() - allows a TI-Basic Example:
program to get keyboard input -
handheld, desktop and emulator on
desktop.
Example:

78 Alphabetical Listing
 getKey() Catalog >
• keypressed := getKey() will return a
key or an empty string if no key has
been pressed. This call will return
immediately.
• keypressed := getKey(1) will wait till
a key is pressed. This call will pause
execution of the program till a key is
pressed.

Handling of key presses:

Handheld Device/Emulator
Desktop Return Value
Key
Esc Esc "esc"
Touchpad - Top click n/a "up"
On n/a "home"

Scratchapps n/a "scratchpad"

Touchpad - Left click n/a "left"
Touchpad - Center click n/a "center"
Touchpad - Right click n/a "right"
Doc n/a "doc"

Tab Tab "tab"

Touchpad - Bottom click Down Arrow "down"
Menu n/a "menu"

Ctrl Ctrl no return

Shift Shift no return
Var n/a "var"
Del n/a "del"

= = "="
trig n/a "trig"
0 through 9 0-9 "0" ... "9"

Alphabetical Listing 79
 Handheld Device/Emulator
Desktop Return Value
Key
Templates n/a "template"
Catalog n/a "cat"

^ ^ "^"
X^2 n/a "square"
/ (division key) / "/"
* (multiply key) * "*"
e^x n/a "exp"
10^x n/a "10power"
+ + "+"
- - "-"

( ( "("
) ) ")"
. . "."
(-) n/a "-" (negate sign)
Enter Enter "enter"

ee n/a "E" (scientific notation E)

a-z a-z alpha = letter pressed (lower
case)
("a" - "z")
shift a-z shift a-z alpha = letter pressed
"A" - "Z"
Note: ctrl-shift works to lock
caps
?! n/a "?!"

pi n/a "pi"
Flag n/a no return

, , ","
Return n/a "return"

80 Alphabetical Listing
 Handheld Device/Emulator
Desktop Return Value
Key
Space Space " " (space)

Inaccessible Special Character Keys like The character is returned

@,!,^, etc.
n/a Function Keys No returned character
n/a Special desktop control keys No returned character
Inaccessible Other desktop keys that are Same character you get in
not available on the Notes (not in a math box)
calculator while getkey() is
waiting for a keystroke. ({,
},;, :, ...)
Note: It is important to note that the presence of getKey() in a program changes how
certain events are handled by the system. Some of these are described below.
Terminate program and Handle event - Exactly as if the user were to break out of program
by pressing the ON key
"Support" below means - System works as expected - program continues to run.

Event Device Desktop - TI-Nspire™

Student Software
Quick Poll Terminate program, Same as the handheld (TI-
handle event Nspire™ Student Software,
TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ NC
Teacher Software-only)
Remote file mgmt Terminate program, Same as the handheld.
handle event (TI-Nspire™ Student
(Incl. sending 'Exit Press 2 Software, TI-Nspire™
Test' file from another Navigator™ NC Teacher
handheld or desktop- Software-only)
handheld)
End Class Terminate program, Support
handle event (TI-Nspire™ Student
Software, TI-Nspire™
Navigator™ NC Teacher
Software-only)

Event Device Desktop - TI-Nspire™ All

Versions
TI-Innovator™ Hub Support - Can successfully Same as the handheld
connect/disconnect issue commands to the TI-
Innovator™ Hub. After you

Alphabetical Listing 81
 exit the program the TI-
Innovator™ Hub is still
working with the
handheld.

getLangInfo() Catalog >

getLangInfo() ⇒ string
Returns a string that corresponds to the
short name of the currently active
language. You can, for example, use it in a
program or function to determine the
current language.
English = “en”
Danish = “da”
German = “de”
Finnish = “fi”
French = “fr”
Italian = “it”
Dutch = “nl”
Belgian Dutch = “nl_BE”
Norwegian = “no”
Portuguese = “pt”
Spanish = “es”
Swedish = “sv”

getLockInfo() Catalog >

getLockInfo( Var) ⇒ value
Returns the current locked/unlocked state
of variable Var.
value =0: Var is unlocked or does not exist.
value =1: Var is locked and cannot be
modified or deleted.
See Lock, page 106, and unLock, page 197.

82 Alphabetical Listing
getMode() Catalog >
getMode(ModeNameInteger) ⇒ value
getMode(0) ⇒ list
getMode( ModeNameInteger) returns a
value representing the current setting of
the ModeNameInteger mode.
getMode(0) returns a list containing
number pairs. Each pair consists of a mode
integer and a setting integer.
For a listing of the modes and their
settings, refer to the table below.
If you save the settings with getMode(0) →
var, you can use setMode( var) in a function
or program to temporarily restore the
settings within the execution of the
function or program only. See setMode() ,
page 162.

Mode Mode
Name Integer Setting Integers
Display 1 1=Float, 2=Float1, 3=Float2, 4=Float3, 5=Float4, 6=Float5,
Digits 7=Float6, 8=Float7, 9=Float8, 10=Float9, 11=Float10,
12=Float11, 13=Float12, 14=Fix0, 15=Fix1, 16=Fix2,
17=Fix3, 18=Fix4, 19=Fix5, 20=Fix6, 21=Fix7, 22=Fix8,
23=Fix9, 24=Fix10, 25=Fix11, 26=Fix12
Angle 2 1=Radian, 2=Degree, 3=Gradian
Exponential 3 1=Normal, 2=Scientific, 3=Engineering
Format
Real or 4 1=Real, 2=Rectangular, 3=Polar
Complex
Auto or 5 1=Auto, 2=Approximate, 3=Exact
Approx.
Vector 6 1=Rectangular, 2=Cylindrical, 3=Spherical
Format
Base 7 1=Decimal, 2=Hex, 3=Binary
Unit 8 1=SI, 2=Eng/US
system

Alphabetical Listing 83
 getNum() Catalog >
getNum(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Transforms the argument into an
expression having a reduced common
denominator, and then returns its
numerator.

GetStr Hub Menu

GetStr [promptString,] var[, statusVar] For examples, see Get .

GetStr [promptString,] func (arg1, ...argn)

[, statusVar]
Programming command: Operates
identically to the Get command, except that
the retrieved value is always interpreted as
a string. By contrast, the Get command
interprets the response as an expression
unless it is enclosed in quotation marks ("").
Note: See also Get, page 77 and Send, page
158.

getType() Catalog >

getType(var) ⇒ string
Returns a string that indicates the data type
of variable var.
If var has not been defined, returns the
string "NONE".

84 Alphabetical Listing
getVarInfo() Catalog >
getVarInfo() ⇒ matrix or string
getVarInfo(LibNameString) ⇒ matrix or
string
getVarInfo() returns a matrix of information
(variable name, type, library accessibility,
and locked/unlocked state) for all variables
and library objects defined in the current
problem.
If no variables are defined, getVarInfo()
returns the string "NONE".
getVarInfo( LibNameString) returns a matrix
of information for all library objects defined
in library LibNameString. LibNameString
must be a string (text enclosed in quotation
marks) or a string variable.
If the library LibNameString does not exist,
an error occurs.
Note the example, in which the result of
getVarInfo() is assigned to variable vs.
Attempting to display row 2 or row 3 of vs
returns an “Invalid list or matrix” error
because at least one of elements in those
rows (variable b, for example) revaluates to
a matrix.
This error could also occur when using Ans
to reevaluate a getVarInfo() result.
The system gives the above error because
the current version of the software does not
support a generalized matrix structure
where an element of a matrix can be either
a matrix or a list.

Alphabetical Listing 85
 Goto Catalog >
Goto labelName
Transfers control to the label labelName .
labelName must be defined in the same
function using a Lbl instruction.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

►Grad Catalog >

Expr1►Grad ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

Converts Expr1 to gradian angle measure.

Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>Grad. In Radian angle mode:

identity() Catalog >

identity(Integer) ⇒ matrix
Returns the identity matrix with a
dimension of Integer.
Integer must be a positive integer.

If Catalog >
If BooleanExpr
Statement
If BooleanExpr Then
Block
EndIf

86 Alphabetical Listing
If Catalog >
If BooleanExpr evaluates to true, executes
the single statement Statement or the block
of statements Block before continuing
execution.
If BooleanExpr evaluates to false,
continues execution without executing the
statement or block of statements.
Block can be either a single statement or a
sequence of statements separated with the
“:” character.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.
If BooleanExpr Then
       Block1
Else
       Block2
EndIf
If BooleanExpr evaluates to true, executes
Block1 and then skips Block2.
If BooleanExpr evaluates to false, skips
Block1 but executes Block2.
Block1 and Block2 can be a single
statement.
If BooleanExpr1 Then
       Block1
ElseIf BooleanExpr2 Then
       Block2
⋮
ElseIf BooleanExprN Then
       BlockN
EndIf
Allows for branching. If BooleanExpr1
evaluates to true, executes Block1. If
BooleanExpr1 evaluates to false, evaluates
BooleanExpr2, and so on.

Alphabetical Listing 87
 ifFn() Catalog >
ifFn( BooleanExpr,Value_If_true [,Value_
If_false [,Value_If_unknown]]) ⇒
expression, list, or matrix
Evaluates the boolean expression Test value of 1 is less than 2.5, so its
BooleanExpr (or each element from corresponding
BooleanExpr ) and produces a result based Value_If_True element of 5 is copied to
on the following rules: the result list.
• BooleanExpr can test a single value, a
list, or a matrix.
• If an element of BooleanExpr evaluates Test value of 2 is less than 2.5, so its
to true, returns the corresponding corresponding
element from Value_If_true . Value_If_True element of 6 is copied to
• If an element of BooleanExpr evaluates the result list.
to false, returns the corresponding
element from Value_If_false . If you
omit Value_If_false , returns undef. Test value of 3 is not less than 2.5, so its
corresponding Value_If_False element of
• If an element of BooleanExpr is neither 10 is copied to the result list.
true nor false, returns the corresponding
element Value_If_unknown. If you omit
Value_If_unknown, returns undef.
• If the second, third, or fourth argument
of the ifFn() function is a single Value_If_true is a single value and
expression, the Boolean test is applied to corresponds to any selected position.
every position in BooleanExpr.
Note: If the simplified BooleanExpr
statement involves a list or matrix, all other
list or matrix arguments must have the
same dimension(s), and the result will have Value_If_false is not specified. Undef is
the same dimension(s). used.

One element selected from Value_If_true.

One element selected from Value_If_
unknown .

imag() Catalog >

imag(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns the imaginary part of the
argument.

88 Alphabetical Listing
imag() Catalog >
Note: All undefined variables are treated as
real variables. See also real(), page 146
imag(List1) ⇒ list
Returns a list of the imaginary parts of the
elements.
imag(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix of the imaginary parts of
the elements.

impDif() Catalog >

impDif(Equation, Var, dependVar[,Ord])
⇒ expression
where the order Ord defaults to 1.
Computes the implicit derivative for
equations in which one variable is defined
implicitly in terms of another.

Indirection See #(), page 226.

inString() Catalog >

inString(srcString, subString[, Start ]) ⇒
integer
Returns the character position in string
srcString at which the first occurrence of
string subString begins.
Start , if included, specifies the character
position within srcString where the search
begins. Default = 1 (the first character of
srcString).
If srcString does not contain subString or
Start is > the length of srcString, returns
zero.

Alphabetical Listing 89
 int() Catalog >
int(Expr) ⇒ integer

int(List1) ⇒ list
int(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns the greatest integer that is less
than or equal to the argument. This
function is identical to floor() .
The argument can be a real or a complex
number.
For a list or matrix, returns the greatest
integer of each of the elements.

intDiv() Catalog >

intDiv(Number1, Number2) ⇒ integer
intDiv(List1, List2) ⇒ list
intDiv(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns the signed integer part of
( Number1 ÷ Number2).
For lists and matrices, returns the signed
integer part of (argument 1 ÷ argument 2)
for each element pair.

integral See ∫(), page 221.

interpolate () Catalog >

interpolate(xValue , xList , yList , Differential equation:
yPrimeList ) ⇒ list y'=-3•y+6•t+5 and y(0)=5
This function does the following:

To see the entire result,

press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.

90 Alphabetical Listing
interpolate () Catalog >
Given xList , yList =f( xList ) , and Use the interpolate() function to calculate the
yPrimeList =f'( xList ) for some unknown function values for the xvaluelist:
function f , a cubic interpolant is used to
approximate the function f at xValue . It is
assumed that xList is a list of
monotonically increasing or decreasing
numbers, but this function may return a
value even when it is not. This function
walks through xList looking for an interval
[xList [i], xList [i+1]] that contains xValue .
If it finds such an interval, it returns an
interpolated value for f( xValue ) ; otherwise,
it returns undef.
xList , yList , and yPrimeList must be of
equal dimension ≥ 2 and contain
expressions that simplify to numbers.
xValue can be an undefined variable, a
number, or a list of numbers.

invχ2 () Catalog >

invχ 2(Area,df )
invChi2(Area,df )
Computes the Inverse cumulative χ 2 (chi-
square) probability function specified by
degree of freedom, df for a given Area
under the curve.

invF() Catalog >

invF(Area,dfNumer,dfDenom)
invF(Area,dfNumer,dfDenom)
computes the Inverse cumulative F
distribution function specified by dfNumer
and dfDenom for a given Area under the
curve.

Alphabetical Listing 91
 invBinom() Catalog >
invBinom Example: Mary and Kevin are playing a dice
(CumulativeProb,NumTrials,Prob, game. Mary has to guess the maximum
OutputForm)⇒ scalar or matrix number of times 6 shows up in 30 rolls. If the
number 6 shows up that many times or less,
Inverse binomial. Given the number of trials Mary wins. Furthermore, the smaller the
( NumTrials) and the probability of success number that she guesses, the greater her
of each trial ( Prob), this function returns winnings. What is the smallest number Mary
the minimum number of successes, k , such can guess if she wants the probability of
that the value, k , is greater than or equal to winning to be greater than 77%?
the given cumulative probability
( CumulativeProb).
OutputForm=0, displays result as a scalar
(default).
OutputForm=1, displays result as a matrix.

invBinomN() Catalog >

invBinomN(CumulativeProb,Prob, Example: Monique is practicing goal shots
NumSuccess,OutputForm)⇒ scalar or for netball. She knows from experience that
matrix her chance of making any one shot is 70%.
She plans to practice until she scores 50
Inverse binomial with respect to N. Given goals. How many shots must she attempt to
the probability of success of each trial ensure that the probability of making at least
( Prob), and the number of successes 50 goals is more than 0.99?
( NumSuccess), this function returns the
minimum number of trials, N, such that the
value, N, is less than or equal to the given
cumulative probability ( CumulativeProb).
OutputForm=0, displays result as a scalar
(default).
OutputForm=1, displays result as a matrix.

invNorm() Catalog >

invNorm(Area[,μ[,σ]])
Computes the inverse cumulative normal
distribution function for a given Area under
the normal distribution curve specified by μ
and σ.

invt() Catalog >

invt(Area,df )

92 Alphabetical Listing
invt() Catalog >
Computes the inverse cumulative student-t
probability function specified by degree of
freedom, df for a given Area under the
curve.

iPart() Catalog >

iPart(Number) ⇒ integer
iPart(List1) ⇒ list
iPart(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns the integer part of the argument.
For lists and matrices, returns the integer
part of each element.
The argument can be a real or a complex
number.

irr() Catalog >

irr(CF0,CFList [,CFFreq]) ⇒ value
Financial function that calculates internal
rate of return of an investment.
CF0 is the initial cash flow at time 0; it
must be a real number.
CFList is a list of cash flow amounts after
the initial cash flow CF0.
CFFreq is an optional list in which each
element specifies the frequency of
occurrence for a grouped (consecutive) cash
flow amount, which is the corresponding
element of CFList . The default is 1; if you
enter values, they must be positive integers
< 10,000.
Note: See also mirr() , page 115.

isPrime() Catalog >

isPrime(Number) ⇒ Boolean constant
expression

Alphabetical Listing 93
 isPrime() Catalog >
Returns true or false to indicate if number
is a whole number ≥ 2 that is evenly Function to find the next prime after a
divisible only by itself and 1. specified number:

If Number exceeds about 306 digits and has

no factors ≤1021, isPrime( Number) displays
an error message.
If you merely want to determine if Number
is prime, use isPrime() instead of factor() . It
is much faster, particularly if Number is not
prime and has a second-largest factor that
exceeds about five digits.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

isVoid() Catalog >

isVoid(Var) ⇒ Boolean constant
expression
isVoid(Expr) ⇒ Boolean constant
expression
isVoid(List ) ⇒ list of Boolean constant
expressions
Returns true or false to indicate if the
argument is a void data type.
For more information on void elements, see
page 251.

94 Alphabetical Listing
L

Lbl Catalog >

Lbl labelName
Defines a label with the name labelName
within a function.
You can use a Goto labelName instruction
to transfer control to the instruction
immediately following the label.
labelName must meet the same naming
requirements as a variable name.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

lcm() Catalog >

lcm(Number1, Number2) ⇒ expression
lcm(List1, List2) ⇒ list
lcm(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns the least common multiple of the
two arguments. The lcm of two fractions is
the lcm of their numerators divided by the
gcd of their denominators. The lcm of
fractional floating-point numbers is their
product.
For two lists or matrices, returns the least
common multiples of the corresponding
elements.

left() Catalog >

left(sourceString[, Num]) ⇒ string
Returns the leftmost Num characters
contained in character string sourceString.
If you omit Num, returns all of
sourceString.
left(List1[, Num]) ⇒ list

Alphabetical Listing 95
 left() Catalog >
Returns the leftmost Num elements
contained in List1.
If you omit Num, returns all of List1.
left(Comparison) ⇒ expression
Returns the left-hand side of an equation or
inequality.

libShortcut() Catalog >

libShortcut(LibNameString, This example assumes a properly stored and
ShortcutNameString refreshed library document named linalg2
[, LibPrivFlag]) ⇒ list of variables that contains objects defined as clearmat,
gauss1 , and gauss2 .
Creates a variable group in the current
problem that contains references to all the
objects in the specified library document
libNameString. Also adds the group
members to the Variables menu. You can
then refer to each object using its
ShortcutNameString.
Set LibPrivFlag=0 to exclude private
library objects (default)
Set LibPrivFlag=1 to include private
library objects
To copy a variable group, see CopyVar on
page 29.
To delete a variable group, see DelVar on
page 48.

limit() or lim() Catalog >

limit(Expr1, Var, Point [,Direction]) ⇒
expression
limit(List1, Var, Point [, Direction]) ⇒
list
limit(Matrix1, Var, Point [, Direction]) ⇒
matrix
Returns the limit requested.
Note: See also Limit template, page 6.
Direction: negative=from left,
positive=from right, otherwise=both. (If
omitted, Direction defaults to both.)

96 Alphabetical Listing
limit() or lim() Catalog >
Limits at positive ∞ and at negative ∞ are
always converted to one-sided limits from
the finite side.
Depending on the circumstances, limit()
returns itself or undef when it cannot
determine a unique limit. This does not
necessarily mean that a unique limit does
not exist. undef means that the result is
either an unknown number with finite or
infinite magnitude, or it is the entire set of
such numbers.
limit() uses methods such as L’Hopital’s
rule, so there are unique limits that it
cannot determine. If Expr1 contains
undefined variables other than Var, you
might have to constrain them to obtain a
more concise result.
Limits can be very sensitive to rounding
error. When possible, avoid the
Approximate setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode and approximate
numbers when computing limits.
Otherwise, limits that should be zero or
have infinite magnitude probably will not,
and limits that should have finite non-zero
magnitude might not.

LinRegBx Catalog >

LinRegBx X,Y[,[Freq][,Category ,Include ]]
Computes the linear regression y = a+b•x on
lists X and Y with frequency Freq. A
summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.

Alphabetical Listing 97
 LinRegBx Catalog >
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: a+b•x

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.r 2 Coefficient of determination

stat.r Correlation coefficient

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

LinRegMx Catalog >

LinRegMx X,Y[,[Freq][,Category ,Include ]]
Computes the linear regression y = m •x+b on
lists X and Y with frequency Freq. A
summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .

98 Alphabetical Listing
LinRegMx Catalog >
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: y = m•x+b

stat.m, Regression coefficients

stat.b

stat.r 2 Coefficient of determination

stat.r Correlation coefficient

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

LinRegtIntervals Catalog >

LinRegtIntervals X,Y[,F[,0[,CLev ]]]
For Slope. Computes a level C confidence
interval for the slope.
LinRegtIntervals X,Y[,F[,1,Xval [,CLev ]]]

Alphabetical Listing 99
 LinRegtIntervals Catalog >
For Response. Computes a predicted y-value,
a level C prediction interval for a single
observation, and a level C confidence
interval for the mean response.
A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension.
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.
F is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in F specifies the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding X and Y
data point. The default value is 1. All
elements must be integers ≥ 0.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: a+b•x

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.df Degrees of freedom

stat.r 2 Coefficient of determination

stat.r Correlation coefficient

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

For Slope type only

Output variable Description

[stat.CLower, stat.CUpper] Confidence interval for the slope

stat.ME Confidence interval margin of error

stat.SESlope Standard error of slope

stat.s Standard error about the line

For Response type only

Output variable Description

[stat.CLower, stat.CUpper] Confidence interval for the mean response

100 Alphabetical Listing

Output variable Description
stat.ME Confidence interval margin of error

stat.SE Standard error of mean response

[stat.LowerPred, Prediction interval for a single observation

stat.UpperPred]

stat.MEPred Prediction interval margin of error

stat.SEPred Standard error for prediction

stat. y a + b•XVal

LinRegtTest Catalog >

LinRegtTest X,Y[,Freq[,Hypoth]]
Computes a linear regression on the X and Y
lists and a t test on the value of slope β and
the correlation coefficient ρ for the equation
y =α +βx. It tests the null hypothesis H :β=0
0
(equivalently, ρ=0) against one of three
alternative hypotheses.
All the lists must have equal dimension.
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Hypoth is an optional value specifying one
of three alternative hypotheses against
which the null hypothesis (H :β=ρ=0) will be
0
tested.
For H : β≠0 and ρ≠0 (default), set Hypoth=0
a
For H : β<0 and ρ<0, set Hypoth<0
a
For H : β>0 and ρ>0, set Hypoth>0
a
A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Alphabetical Listing 101

Output variable Description
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a + b•x

stat.t t-Statistic for significance test

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.s Standard error about the line

stat.SESlope Standard error of slope

stat.r 2 Coefficient of determination

stat.r Correlation coefficient

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

linSolve() Catalog >

linSolve( SystemOfLinearEqns, Var1,
Var2, ...) ⇒ list
linSolve(LinearEqn1 and LinearEqn2 and
..., Var1, Var2, ...) ⇒ list
linSolve({LinearEqn1, LinearEqn2, ...},
Var1, Var2, ...) ⇒ list
linSolve(SystemOfLinearEqns, {Var1,
Var2, ...}) ⇒ list
linSolve(LinearEqn1 and LinearEqn2 and
..., {Var1, Var2, ...}) ⇒ list
linSolve({LinearEqn1, LinearEgn2, ...},
{Var1, Var2, ...}) ⇒ list
Returns a list of solutions for the variables
Var1, Var2, ...
The first argument must evaluate to a
system of linear equations or a single linear
equation. Otherwise, an argument error
occurs.
For example, evaluating linSolve(x=1
and x=2,x) produces an “Argument
Error” result.

102 Alphabetical Listing

ΔList() Catalog >
ΔList(List1) ⇒ list
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing deltaList(...).
Returns a list containing the differences
between consecutive elements in List1.
Each element of List1 is subtracted from
the next element of List1. The resulting list
is always one element shorter than the
original List1.

list ►mat() Catalog >

list►mat(List [, elementsPerRow]) ⇒
matrix
Returns a matrix filled row-by-row with the
elements from List .
elementsPerRow, if included, specifies the
number of elements per row. Default is the
number of elements in List (one row).
If List does not fill the resulting matrix,
zeros are added.
Note: You can insert this function from the
computer keyboard by typing list@>mat
(...).

►ln Catalog >

Expr►ln ⇒ expression
Causes the input Expr to be converted to an
expression containing only natural logs (ln).
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>ln.

ln() /u keys
ln(Expr1) ⇒ expression

ln(List1) ⇒ list
If complex format mode is Real:

Alphabetical Listing 103

 ln() /u keys
Returns the natural logarithm of the
argument.
For a list, returns the natural logarithms of
the elements.
If complex format mode is Rectangular:

ln(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode and Rectangular

complex format:
Returns the matrix natural logarithm of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the natural logarithm of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() on.
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.
To see the entire result,
press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.

LnReg Catalog >

LnReg X, Y[, [Freq] [, Category , Include ]]
Computes the logarithmic regression y =
a+b•ln(x) on lists X and Y with frequency
Freq. A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.

104 Alphabetical Listing

LnReg Catalog >
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a+b•ln(x)

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.r 2 Coefficient of linear determination for transformed data

stat.r Correlation coefficient for transformed data (ln(x), y)

stat.Resid Residuals associated with the logarithmic model

stat.ResidTrans Residuals associated with linear fit of transformed data

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

Local Catalog >

Local Var1[, Var2] [, Var3] ...
Declares the specified vars as local
variables. Those variables exist only during
evaluation of a function and are deleted
when the function finishes execution.
Note: Local variables save memory because
they only exist temporarily. Also, they do
not disturb any existing global variable
values. Local variables must be used for For
loops and for temporarily saving values in a
multi-line function since modifications on
global variables are not allowed in a
function.

Alphabetical Listing 105

 Local Catalog >
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

Lock Catalog >

LockVar1[, Var2] [, Var3] ...
LockVar.
Locks the specified variables or variable
group. Locked variables cannot be modified
or deleted.
You cannot lock or unlock the system
variable Ans, and you cannot lock the
system variable groups stat . or tvm.
Note: The Lock command clears the
Undo/Redo history when applied to
unlocked variables.
See unLock, page 197, and getLockInfo() ,
page 82.

log() /s keys
log( Expr1[,Expr2]) ⇒ expression

log( List1[,Expr2]) ⇒ list

Returns the base-Expr2 logarithm of the

first argument.
Note: See also Log template, page 2. If complex format mode is Real:
For a list, returns the base-Expr2 logarithm
of the elements.
If the second argument is omitted, 10 is
used as the base. If complex format mode is Rectangular:

106 Alphabetical Listing

log() /s keys
log( squareMatrix1[,Expr]) ⇒ In Radian angle mode and Rectangular
squareMatrix complex format:

Returns the matrix base-Expr logarithm of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the base-Expr logarithm of
each element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers. To see the entire result,
press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
If the base argument is omitted, 10 is used cursor.
as base.

►logbase Catalog >

Expr►logbase(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Causes the input Expression to be simplified
to an expression using base Expr1.
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>logbase
(...).

Logistic Catalog >

Logistic X, Y[, [Freq] [, Category , Include ]]
Computes the logistic regression y = (c/
(1+a•e-bx)) on lists X and Y with frequency
Freq. A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.

Alphabetical Listing 107

 Logistic Catalog >
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: c/(1+a•e-bx)

stat.a, Regression coefficients

stat.b, stat.c

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

LogisticD Catalog >

LogisticD X, Y [, [Iterations] , [Freq] [,
Category , Include ] ]
Computes the logistic regression y = (c/
(1+a•e-bx)+d) on lists X and Y with frequency
Freq, using a specified number of
Iterations. A summary of results is stored in
the stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.

108 Alphabetical Listing

LogisticD Catalog >
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: c/(1+a•e-bx)+d)

stat.a, stat.b, Regression coefficients

stat.c, stat.d

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

Alphabetical Listing 109

 Loop Catalog >
Loop
     Block
EndLoop
Repeatedly executes the statements in
Block . Note that the loop will be executed
endlessly, unless a Goto or Exit instruction
is executed within Block .
Block is a sequence of statements
separated with the “:” character.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

LU Catalog >
LU Matrix , lMatrix , uMatrix , pMatrix
[,Tol]
Calculates the Doolittle LU (lower-upper)
decomposition of a real or complex matrix.
The lower triangular matrix is stored in
lMatrix , the upper triangular matrix in
uMatrix , and the permutation matrix
(which describes the row swaps done
during the calculation) in pMatrix .
lMatrix•uMatrix = pMatrix•matrix
Optionally, any matrix element is treated as
zero if its absolute value is less than Tol .
This tolerance is used only if the matrix has
floating-point entries and does not contain
any symbolic variables that have not been
assigned a value. Otherwise, Tol is ignored.

• If you use /· or set the Auto or

Approximate mode to Approximate,
computations are done using floating-
point arithmetic.
• If Tol is omitted or not used, the default
tolerance is calculated as:
5E ⁻14•max(dim(Matrix ))•rowNorm
(Matrix )

110 Alphabetical Listing

LU Catalog >
The LU factorization algorithm uses partial
pivoting with row interchanges.

mat ►list() Catalog >

mat►list(Matrix ) ⇒ list
Returns a list filled with the elements in
Matrix . The elements are copied from
Matrix row by row.
Note: You can insert this function from the
computer keyboard by typing mat@>list
(...).

max() Catalog >

max(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression

max(List1, List2) ⇒ list

max(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns the maximum of the two
arguments. If the arguments are two lists
or matrices, returns a list or matrix
containing the maximum value of each pair
of corresponding elements.
max(List ) ⇒ expression
Returns the maximum element in list .
max(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a row vector containing the
maximum element of each column in
Matrix1.

Alphabetical Listing 111

 max() Catalog >
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.
Note: See also fMax() and min().

mean() Catalog >

mean(List [, freqList ]) ⇒ expression
Returns the mean of the elements in List .
Each freqList element counts the number
of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in List .
mean(Matrix1[, freqMatrix ]) ⇒ matrix In Rectangular vector format:

Returns a row vector of the means of all

the columns in Matrix1.
Each freqMatrix element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in Matrix1.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.

median() Catalog >

median(List [, freqList ]) ⇒ expression
Returns the median of the elements in List .
Each freqList element counts the number
of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in List .
median(Matrix1[, freqMatrix ]) ⇒ matrix
Returns a row vector containing the
medians of the columns in Matrix1.
Each freqMatrix element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in Matrix1.

112 Alphabetical Listing

median() Catalog >
Notes:
• All entries in the list or matrix must
simplify to numbers.
• Empty (void) elements in the list or
matrix are ignored. For more information
on empty elements, see page 251.

MedMed Catalog >

MedMed X,Y [, Freq] [, Category , Include ]]
Computes the median-median line y =
(m •x+b) on lists X and Y with frequency
Freq. A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Median-median line equation: m•x+b

stat.m, Model coefficients

stat.b

Alphabetical Listing 113

Output
Description
variable
stat.Resid Residuals from the median-median line

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

mid() Catalog >

mid(sourceString, Start [, Count ]) ⇒
string
Returns Count characters from character
string sourceString, beginning with
character number Start .
If Count is omitted or is greater than the
dimension of sourceString, returns all
characters from sourceString, beginning
with character number Start .
Count must be ≥ 0. If Count = 0, returns an
empty string.
mid(sourceList , Start [, Count ]) ⇒ list
Returns Count elements from sourceList ,
beginning with element number Start .
If Count is omitted or is greater than the
dimension of sourceList , returns all
elements from sourceList , beginning with
element number Start .
Count must be ≥ 0. If Count = 0, returns an
empty list.
mid(sourceStringList , Start [, Count ]) ⇒
list
Returns Count strings from the list of
strings sourceStringList , beginning with
element number Start .

114 Alphabetical Listing

min() Catalog >
min(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression

min(List1, List2) ⇒ list

min(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns the minimum of the two
arguments. If the arguments are two lists
or matrices, returns a list or matrix
containing the minimum value of each pair
of corresponding elements.
min(List ) ⇒ expression
Returns the minimum element of List .
min(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns a row vector containing the
minimum element of each column in
Matrix1.
Note: See also fMin() and max().

mirr() Catalog >

mirr
(financeRate ,reinvestRate ,CF0,CFList
[,CFFreq])
Financial function that returns the modified
internal rate of return of an investment.
financeRate is the interest rate that you
pay on the cash flow amounts.
reinvestRate is the interest rate at which
the cash flows are reinvested.
CF0 is the initial cash flow at time 0; it
must be a real number.
CFList is a list of cash flow amounts after
the initial cash flow CF0.
CFFreq is an optional list in which each
element specifies the frequency of
occurrence for a grouped (consecutive) cash
flow amount, which is the corresponding
element of CFList . The default is 1; if you
enter values, they must be positive integers
< 10,000.

Alphabetical Listing 115

 mirr() Catalog >
Note: See also irr() , page 93.

mod() Catalog >

mod(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression

mod(List1, List2) ⇒ list

mod(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns the first argument modulo the
second argument as defined by the
identities:
mod(x,0) = x
mod(x,y) = x − y floor(x/y)
When the second argument is non-zero, the
result is periodic in that argument. The
result is either zero or has the same sign as
the second argument.
If the arguments are two lists or two
matrices, returns a list or matrix containing
the modulo of each pair of corresponding
elements.
Note: See also remain() , page 149

mRow() Catalog >

mRow(Expr, Matrix1, Index ) ⇒ matrix
Returns a copy of Matrix1 with each
element in row Index of Matrix1 multiplied
by Expr.

mRowAdd() Catalog >

mRowAdd(Expr, Matrix1, Index1, Index2)
⇒ matrix
Returns a copy of Matrix1 with each
element in row Index2 of Matrix1 replaced
with:
Expr • row Index1 + row Index2

116 Alphabetical Listing

MultReg Catalog >
MultReg Y, X1[,X2[,X3,…[,X10]]]
Calculates multiple linear regression of list Y
on lists X1, X2, …, X10. A summary of
results is stored in the stat.results variable.
(See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: b0+b1•x1+b2•x2+ ...

stat.b0, stat.b1, ... Regression coefficients

stat.R 2 Coefficient of multiple determination

stat. y List yList = b0+b1•x1+ ...

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

MultRegIntervals Catalog >

MultRegIntervals Y, X1[, X2[, X3,…[,
X10]]], XValList [, CLevel ]
Computes a predicted y-value, a level C
prediction interval for a single observation,
and a level C confidence interval for the
mean response.
A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: b0+b1•x1+b2•x2+ ...

stat. y A point estimate: y = b0 + b1 • xl + ... for XValList

stat.dfError Error degrees of freedom

Alphabetical Listing 117

Output variable Description
stat.CLower, stat.CUpper Confidence interval for a mean response

stat.ME Confidence interval margin of error

stat.SE Standard error of mean response

stat.LowerPred, Prediction interval for a single observation

stat.UpperrPred

stat.MEPred Prediction interval margin of error

stat.SEPred Standard error for prediction

stat.bList List of regression coefficients, {b0,b1,b2,...}

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

MultRegTests Catalog >

MultRegTests Y, X1[, X2[, X3,…[, X10]]]
Multiple linear regression test computes a
multiple linear regression on the given data
and provides the global F test statistic and t
test statistics for the coefficients.
A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.
Outputs

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: b0+b1•x1+b2•x2+ ...

stat.F Global F test statistic

stat.PVal P-value associated with global F statistic

stat.R 2 Coefficient of multiple determination

stat.AdjR 2 Adjusted coefficient of multiple determination

stat.s Standard deviation of the error

stat.DW Durbin-Watson statistic; used to determine whether first-order auto correlation is

present in the model

118 Alphabetical Listing

Output
Description
variable
stat.dfReg Regression degrees of freedom

stat.SSReg Regression sum of squares

stat.MSReg Regression mean square

stat.dfError Error degrees of freedom

stat.SSError Error sum of squares

stat.MSError Error mean square

stat.bList {b0,b1,...} List of coefficients

stat.tList List of t statistics, one for each coefficient in the bList

stat.PList List P-values for each t statistic

stat.SEList List of standard errors for coefficients in bList

stat. y List yList = b0+b1•x1+ . . .

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.sResid Standardized residuals; obtained by dividing a residual by its standard deviation

stat.CookDist Cook’s distance; measure of the influence of an observation based on the residual
and leverage

stat.Leverage Measure of how far the values of the independent variable are from their mean
values

nand /= keys
BooleanExpr1 nand BooleanExpr2 returns
Boolean expression
BooleanList1 nand BooleanList2 returns
Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1 nand BooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix
Returns the negation of a logical and
operation on the two arguments. Returns
true, false, or a simplified form of the
equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons
element by element.

Alphabetical Listing 119

 nand /= keys
Integer1 nand Integer2 ⇒ integer
Compares two real integers bit-by-bit using
a nand operation. Internally, both integers
are converted to signed, 64-bit binary
numbers. When corresponding bits are
compared, the result is 0 if both bits are 1;
otherwise, the result is 1. The returned
value represents the bit results, and is
displayed according to the Base mode.
You can enter the integers in any number
base. For a binary or hexadecimal entry, you
must use the 0b or 0h prefix, respectively.
Without a prefix, integers are treated as
decimal (base 10).

nCr() Catalog >

nCr(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression
For integer Expr1 and Expr2 with Expr1 ≥
Expr2 ≥ 0, nCr() is the number of
combinations of Expr1 things taken Expr2
at a time. (This is also known as a binomial
coefficient.) Both arguments can be
integers or symbolic expressions.
nCr(Expr, 0) ⇒ 1
nCr(Expr, negInteger) ⇒ 0
nCr(Expr, posInteger) ⇒ Expr•(Expr−1) ...
(Expr−posInteger+1) / posInteger!
nCr(Expr, nonInteger) ⇒ expression! /
((Expr−nonInteger)!•nonInteger!)

nCr(List1, List2) ⇒ list

Returns a list of combinations based on the
corresponding element pairs in the two
lists. The arguments must be the same size
list.
nCr(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix

120 Alphabetical Listing

nCr() Catalog >
Returns a matrix of combinations based on
the corresponding element pairs in the two
matrices. The arguments must be the same
size matrix.

nDerivative() Catalog >

nDerivative(Expr1,Var=Value [,Order])
⇒ value
nDerivative(Expr1,Var[,Order])
|Var=Value ⇒ value
Returns the numerical derivative calculated
using auto differentiation methods.
When Value is specified, it overrides any
prior variable assignment or any current “|”
substitution for the variable.
Order of the derivative must be 1 or 2.

newList() Catalog >

newList(numElements) ⇒ list
Returns a list with a dimension of
numElements. Each element is zero.

newMat() Catalog >

newMat(numRows, numColumns) ⇒
matrix
Returns a matrix of zeros with the
dimension numRows by numColumns.

nfMax() Catalog >

nfMax(Expr, Var) ⇒ value
nfMax(Expr, Var, lowBound) ⇒ value
nfMax(Expr, Var, lowBound, upBound) ⇒
value
nfMax(Expr, Var) |
lowBound≤Var≤upBound ⇒ value

Alphabetical Listing 121

 nfMax() Catalog >
Returns a candidate numerical value of
variable Var where the local maximum of
Expr occurs.
If you supply lowBound and upBound, the
function looks in the closed interval
[lowBound,upBound] for the local
maximum.
Note: See also fMax() and d() .

nfMin() Catalog >

nfMin(Expr, Var) ⇒ value
nfMin(Expr, Var, lowBound) ⇒ value
nfMin(Expr, Var, lowBound, upBound) ⇒
value
nfMin(Expr, Var) |
lowBound≤Var≤upBound ⇒ value
Returns a candidate numerical value of
variable Var where the local minimum of
Expr occurs.
If you supply lowBound and upBound, the
function looks in the closed interval
[lowBound,upBound] for the local
minimum.
Note: See also fMin() and d() .

nInt() Catalog >

nInt(Expr1, Var, Lower, Upper) ⇒
expression
If the integrand Expr1 contains no variable
other than Var, and if Lower and Upper
are constants, positive ∞, or negative ∞,
then nInt() returns an approximation of ∫
( Expr1, Var, Lower, Upper) . This
approximation is a weighted average of
some sample values of the integrand in the
interval Lower<Var<Upper.

122 Alphabetical Listing

nInt() Catalog >
The goal is six significant digits. The
adaptive algorithm terminates when it
seems likely that the goal has been
achieved, or when it seems unlikely that
additional samples will yield a worthwhile
improvement.
A warning is displayed (“Questionable
accuracy”) when it seems that the goal has
not been achieved.
Nest nInt() to do multiple numeric
integration. Integration limits can depend
on integration variables outside them.

Note: See also ∫() , page 221.

nom() Catalog >

nom(effectiveRate,CpY) ⇒ value
Financial function that converts the annual
effective interest rate effectiveRate to a
nominal rate, given CpY as the number of
compounding periods per year.
effectiveRate must be a real number, and
CpY must be a real number > 0.
Note: See also eff() , page 58.

nor /= keys
BooleanExpr1 nor BooleanExpr2 returns
Boolean expression
BooleanList1 nor BooleanList2 returns
Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1 nor BooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix
Returns the negation of a logical or
operation on the two arguments. Returns
true, false, or a simplified form of the
equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons
element by element.

Alphabetical Listing 123

 nor /= keys
Integer1 nor Integer2 ⇒ integer
Compares two real integers bit-by-bit using
a nor operation. Internally, both integers
are converted to signed, 64-bit binary
numbers. When corresponding bits are
compared, the result is 1 if both bits are 1;
otherwise, the result is 0. The returned
value represents the bit results, and is
displayed according to the Base mode.
You can enter the integers in any number
base. For a binary or hexadecimal entry, you
must use the 0b or 0h prefix, respectively.
Without a prefix, integers are treated as
decimal (base 10).

norm() Catalog >

norm(Matrix ) ⇒ expression
norm(Vector) ⇒ expression
Returns the Frobenius norm.

normalLine() Catalog >

normalLine(Expr1,Var,Point ) ⇒
expression
normalLine(Expr1,Var=Point ) ⇒
expression
Returns the normal line to the curve
represented by Expr1 at the point specified
in Var=Point .
Make sure that the independent variable is
not defined. For example, If f1(x):=5 and
x:=3, then normalLine( f1(x),x,2) returns
“false.”

124 Alphabetical Listing

normCdf() Catalog >
normCdf(lowBound,upBound[,μ[,σ]]) ⇒
number if lowBound and upBound are
numbers, list if lowBound and upBound are
lists
Computes the normal distribution probability
between lowBound and upBound for the
specified μ (default=0) and σ (default=1).
For P(X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = ⁻∞.

normPdf() Catalog >

normPdf(XVal [,μ[,σ]]) ⇒ number if XVal is
a number, list if XVal is a list
Computes the probability density function
for the normal distribution at a specified
XVal value for the specified μ and σ.

not Catalog >

not BooleanExpr ⇒ Boolean expression
Returns true, false, or a simplified form of
the argument.
not Integer1 ⇒ integer In Hex base mode:

Returns the one’s complement of a real Important: Zero, not the letter O.
integer. Internally, Integer1 is converted to
a signed, 64-bit binary number. The value of
each bit is flipped (0 becomes 1, and vice
versa) for the one’s complement. Results
are displayed according to the Base mode. In Bin base mode:

You can enter the integer in any number

base. For a binary or hexadecimal entry, you
must use the 0b or 0h prefix, respectively.
Without a prefix, the integer is treated as
decimal (base 10).
If you enter a decimal integer that is too To see the entire result,
large for a signed, 64-bit binary form, a press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
symmetric modulo operation is used to cursor.
bring the value into the appropriate range.
Note: A binary entry can have up to 64 digits
For more information, see ►Base2, page
(not counting the 0b prefix). A hexadecimal
17.
entry can have up to 16 digits.

Alphabetical Listing 125

 nPr() Catalog >
nPr(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression
For integer Expr1 and Expr2 with Expr1 ≥
Expr2 ≥ 0, nPr() is the number of
permutations of Expr1 things taken Expr2
at a time. Both arguments can be integers
or symbolic expressions.
nPr(Expr, 0 ⇒ 1
nPr(Expr, negInteger) ⇒ 1 / ((Expr+1)•
(Expr+2) ... (expression−negInteger))
nPr(Expr, posInteger) ⇒ Expr•(Expr−1) ...
(Expr−posInteger+1)
nPr(Expr, nonInteger) ⇒ Expr! /
(Expr−nonInteger)!
nPr(List1, List2) ⇒ list
Returns a list of permutations based on the
corresponding element pairs in the two
lists. The arguments must be the same size
list.
nPr(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix of permutations based on
the corresponding element pairs in the two
matrices. The arguments must be the same
size matrix.

npv() Catalog >

npv(InterestRate ,CFO,CFList [,CFFreq])
Financial function that calculates net
present value; the sum of the present
values for the cash inflows and outflows. A
positive result for npv indicates a profitable
investment.
InterestRate is the rate by which to
discount the cash flows (the cost of money)
over one period.
CF0 is the initial cash flow at time 0; it
must be a real number.
CFList is a list of cash flow amounts after
the initial cash flow CF0.

126 Alphabetical Listing

npv() Catalog >
CFFreq is a list in which each element
specifies the frequency of occurrence for a
grouped (consecutive) cash flow amount,
which is the corresponding element of
CFList . The default is 1; if you enter
values, they must be positive integers <
10,000.

nSolve() Catalog >

nSolve(Equation,Var[=Guess]) ⇒ number
or error_string
nSolve(Equation,Var[=Guess],lowBound)
⇒ number or error_string
nSolve(Equation,Var Note: If there are multiple solutions, you can
[=Guess],lowBound,upBound) ⇒ number use a guess to help find a particular solution.
or error_string
nSolve(Equation,Var[=Guess]) |
lowBound≤Var≤upBound ⇒ number or
error_string
Iteratively searches for one approximate
real numeric solution to Equation for its
one variable. Specify the variable as:
variable
– or –
variable = real number
For example, x is valid and so is x=3.
nSolve() is often much faster than solve() or
zeros() , particularly if the “|” operator is
used to constrain the search to a small
interval containing exactly one simple
solution.
nSolve() attempts to determine either one
point where the residual is zero or two
relatively close points where the residual
has opposite signs and the magnitude of
the residual is not excessive. If it cannot
achieve this using a modest number of
sample points, it returns the string “no
solution found.”

Alphabetical Listing 127

 nSolve() Catalog >
Note: See also cSolve() , cZeros() , solve() ,
and zeros() .

OneVar Catalog >

OneVar [1,]X[,[Freq][,Category ,Include ]]
OneVar [n,]X1,X2[X3[,…[,X20]]]
Calculates 1-variable statistics on up to 20
lists. A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of numeric category codes
for the corresponding X values.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
An empty (void) element in any of the lists
X, Freq, or Category results in a void for
the corresponding element of all those lists.
An empty element in any of the lists X1
through X20 results in a void for the
corresponding element of all those lists. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.

Output variable Description

stat. v Mean of x values

stat. Σ x Sum of x values

stat. Σ x 2 Sum of x 2 values

128 Alphabetical Listing

Output variable Description
stat.sx Sample standard deviation of x

stat. σx Population standard deviation of x

stat.n Number of data points

stat.MinX Minimum of x values

stat.Q X 1st Quartile of x

1
stat.MedianX Median of x

stat.Q X 3rd Quartile of x

3
stat.MaxX Maximum of x values

stat.SSX Sum of squares of deviations from the mean of x

or Catalog >
BooleanExpr1 or BooleanExpr2 returns
Boolean expression
BooleanList1 or BooleanList2 returns
Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1 or BooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix
Returns true or false or a simplified form of
the original entry.
Returns true if either or both expressions
simplify to true. Returns false only if both
expressions evaluate to false.
Note: See xor.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.
Integer1 or Integer2 ⇒ integer In Hex base mode:

Important: Zero, not the letter O.

In Bin base mode:

Alphabetical Listing 129

 or Catalog >
Compares two real integers bit-by-bit using Note: A binary entry can have up to 64 digits
an or operation. Internally, both integers (not counting the 0b prefix). A hexadecimal
are converted to signed, 64-bit binary entry can have up to 16 digits.
numbers. When corresponding bits are
compared, the result is 1 if either bit is 1;
the result is 0 only if both bits are 0. The
returned value represents the bit results,
and is displayed according to the Base
mode.
You can enter the integers in any number
base. For a binary or hexadecimal entry, you
must use the 0b or 0h prefix, respectively.
Without a prefix, integers are treated as
decimal (base 10).
If you enter a decimal integer that is too
large for a signed, 64-bit binary form, a
symmetric modulo operation is used to
bring the value into the appropriate range.
For more information, see ►Base2, page
17.
Note: See xor.

ord() Catalog >

ord(String) ⇒ integer
ord(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the numeric code of the first
character in character string String, or a list
of the first characters of each list element.

P►Rx() Catalog >

P►Rx(rExpr, θExpr) ⇒ expression In Radian angle mode:
P►Rx(rList , θList ) ⇒ list
P►Rx(rMatrix , θMatrix ) ⇒ matrix
Returns the equivalent x-coordinate of the
(r, θ) pair.

130 Alphabetical Listing

P►Rx() Catalog >
Note: The θ argument is interpreted as
either a degree, gradian or radian angle,
according to the current angle mode. If the
argument is an expression, you can use °, G,
or r to override the angle mode setting
temporarily.
Note: You can insert this function from the
computer keyboard by typing P@>Rx(...).

P►Ry() Catalog >

P►Ry(rExpr, θExpr) ⇒ expression In Radian angle mode:

P►Ry(rList , θList ) ⇒ list

P►Ry(rMatrix , θMatrix ) ⇒ matrix
Returns the equivalent y-coordinate of the
(r, θ) pair.
Note: The θ argument is interpreted as
either a degree, radian or gradian angle,
according to the current angle mode. If the
argument is an expression, you can use °, G,
or r to override the angle mode setting
temporarily.
Note: You can insert this function from the
computer keyboard by typing P@>Ry(...).

PassErr Catalog >

PassErr For an example of PassErr , See Example 2
under the Try command, page 191.
Passes an error to the next level.
If system variable errCode is zero, PassErr
does not do anything.
The Else clause of the Try...Else...EndTry
block should use ClrErr or PassErr. If the
error is to be processed or ignored, use
ClrErr. If what to do with the error is not
known, use PassErr to send it to the next
error handler. If there are no more pending
Try...Else...EndTry error handlers, the error
dialog box will be displayed as normal.

Alphabetical Listing 131

 PassErr Catalog >
Note: See also ClrErr, page 25, and Try, page
191.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product guidebook.

piecewise() Catalog >

piecewise(Expr1[, Cond1[, Expr2 [, Cond2
[, … ]]]])
Returns definitions for a piecewise function
in the form of a list. You can also create
piecewise definitions by using a template.
Note: See also Piecewise template, page 3.

poissCdf() Catalog >

poissCdf(λ,lowBound,upBound) ⇒ number
if lowBound and upBound are numbers, list
if lowBound and upBound are lists
poissCdf(λ,upBound)for P(0≤X≤upBound) ⇒
number if upBound is a number, list if
upBound is a list
Computes a cumulative probability for the
discrete Poisson distribution with specified
mean λ.
For P(X ≤ upBound), set lowBound=0

poissPdf() Catalog >

poissPdf(λ,XVal ) ⇒ number if XVal is a
number, list if XVal is a list
Computes a probability for the discrete
Poisson distribution with the specified mean
λ.

132 Alphabetical Listing

►Polar Catalog >
Vector ►Polar
Note: You can insert
this operator from the
computer keyboard by
typing @>Polar.
Displays vector in polar
form [r∠ θ]. The vector
must be of dimension 2
and can be a row or a
column.
Note: ►Polar is a
display-format
instruction, not a
conversion function.
You can use it only at
the end of an entry
line, and it does not
update ans.
Note: See also ►Rect,
page 146.
complexValue ►Polar In Radian angle mode:

Displays
complexVector in
polar form.
• Degree angle mode
returns (r∠ θ).
• Radian angle mode
returns reiθ. In Gradian angle mode:

complexValue can
have any complex
form. However, an reiθ
entry causes an error in
In Degree angle mode:
Degree angle mode.
Note: You must use the
parentheses for an
(r∠ θ) polar entry.

polyCoeffs() Catalog >

polyCoeffs(Poly [,Var]) ⇒ list

Alphabetical Listing 133

 polyCoeffs() Catalog >
Returns a list of the coefficients of
polynomial Poly with respect to variable
Var.
Poly must be a polynomial expression in
Var. We recommend that you do not omit Expands the polynomial and selects x for the
Var unless Poly is an expression in a single omitted Var.
variable.

polyDegree() Catalog >

polyDegree(Poly [,Var]) ⇒ value
Returns the degree of polynomial
expression Poly with respect to variable
Var. If you omit Var, the polyDegree() Constant polynomials
function selects a default from the
variables contained in the polynomial Poly .
Poly must be a polynomial expression in
Var. We recommend that you do not omit
Var unless Poly is an expression in a single
variable.

The degree can be extracted even though

the coefficients cannot. This is because the
degree can be extracted without expanding
the polynomial.

134 Alphabetical Listing

polyEval() Catalog >
polyEval(List1, Expr1) ⇒ expression
polyEval(List1, List2) ⇒ expression
Interprets the first argument as the
coefficient of a descending-degree
polynomial, and returns the polynomial
evaluated for the value of the second
argument.

polyGcd() Catalog >

polyGcd(Expr1,Expr2) ⇒ expression
Returns greatest common divisor of the
two arguments.
Expr1 and Expr2 must be polynomial
expressions.
List, matrix, and Boolean arguments are not
allowed.

polyQuotient() Catalog >

polyQuotient(Poly1,Poly2 [,Var]) ⇒
expression
Returns the quotient of polynomial Poly1
divided by polynomial Poly2 with respect to
the specified variable Var.
Poly1 and Poly2 must be polynomial
expressions in Var. We recommend that
you do not omit Var unless Poly1 and
Poly2 are expressions in the same single
variable.

Alphabetical Listing 135

 polyRemainder() Catalog >
polyRemainder(Poly1,Poly2 [,Var]) ⇒
expression
Returns the remainder of polynomial Poly1
divided by polynomial Poly2 with respect to
the specified variable Var.
Poly1 and Poly2 must be polynomial
expressions in Var. We recommend that
you do not omit Var unless Poly1 and
Poly2 are expressions in the same single
variable.

polyRoots() Catalog >

polyRoots(Poly ,Var) ⇒ list
polyRoots(ListOfCoeffs) ⇒ list
The first syntax, polyRoots( Poly ,Var) ,
returns a list of real roots of polynomial
Poly with respect to variable Var. If no real
roots exist, returns an empty list: { }.
Poly must be a polynomial in one variable.
The second syntax, polyRoots
( ListOfCoeffs) , returns a list of real roots
for the coefficients in ListOfCoeffs.
Note: See also cPolyRoots() , page 36.

PowerReg Catalog >

PowerReg X,Y[, Freq][, Category , Include ]]
Computes the power regressiony = (a•(x) b)
on lists X and Y with frequency Freq. A
summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.

136 Alphabetical Listing

PowerReg Catalog >
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a•(x)b

stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients

stat.r 2 Coefficient of linear determination for transformed data

stat.r Correlation coefficient for transformed data (ln(x), ln(y))

stat.Resid Residuals associated with the power model

stat.ResidTrans Residuals associated with linear fit of transformed data

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

Prgm Catalog >

Prgm Calculate GCD and display intermediate
     Block results.
EndPrgm
Template for creating a user-defined
program. Must be used with the Define,
Define LibPub, or Define LibPriv command.

Alphabetical Listing 137

 Prgm Catalog >
Block can be a single statement, a series
of statements separated with the “:”
character, or a series of statements on
separate lines.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

prodSeq() See Π (), page 223.

Product (PI) See Π (), page 223.

product() Catalog >

product(List [, Start [, End]]) ⇒ expression
Returns the product of the elements
contained in List . Start and End are
optional. They specify a range of elements.
product(Matrix1[, Start [, End]]) ⇒ matrix
Returns a row vector containing the
products of the elements in the columns of
Matrix1. Start and end are optional. They
specify a range of rows.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.

138 Alphabetical Listing

propFrac() Catalog >
propFrac(Expr1[, Var]) ⇒ expression
propFrac( rational_number) returns
rational_number as the sum of an integer
and a fraction having the same sign and a
greater denominator magnitude than
numerator magnitude.
propFrac( rational_expression,Var) returns
the sum of proper ratios and a polynomial
with respect to Var. The degree of Var in
the denominator exceeds the degree of Var
in the numerator in each proper ratio.
Similar powers of Var are collected. The
terms and their factors are sorted with Var
as the main variable.
If Var is omitted, a proper fraction
expansion is done with respect to the most
main variable. The coefficients of the
polynomial part are then made proper with
respect to their most main variable first
and so on.
For rational expressions, propFrac() is a
faster but less extreme alternative to
expand() .
You can use the propFrac() function to
represent mixed fractions and demonstrate
addition and subtraction of mixed fractions.

QR Catalog >
QR Matrix , qMatrix , rMatrix [, Tol ] The floating-point number (9.) in m1 causes
results to be calculated in floating-point
Calculates the Householder QR factorization form.
of a real or complex matrix. The resulting Q
and R matrices are stored to the specified
Matrix . The Q matrix is unitary. The R
matrix is upper triangular.

Alphabetical Listing 139

 QR Catalog >
Optionally, any matrix element is treated as
zero if its absolute value is less than Tol .
This tolerance is used only if the matrix has
floating-point entries and does not contain
any symbolic variables that have not been
assigned a value. Otherwise, Tol is ignored.

• If you use /· or set the Auto or

Approximate mode to Approximate,
computations are done using floating-
point arithmetic.
• If Tol is omitted or not used, the default
tolerance is calculated as:
5E −14 •max(dim(Matrix )) •rowNorm
(Matrix )
The QR factorization is computed
numerically using Householder
transformations. The symbolic solution is
computed using Gram-Schmidt. The
columns in qMatName are the orthonormal
basis vectors that span the space defined by
matrix .

QuadReg Catalog >

QuadReg X,Y[, Freq][, Category , Include ]]
Computes the quadratic polynomial
regression y=a•x 2 +b•x+c on lists X and Y
with frequency Freq. A summary of results
is stored in the stat.results variable. (See
page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.

140 Alphabetical Listing

QuadReg Catalog >
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a•x 2+b•x+c

stat.a, Regression coefficients

stat.b, stat.c

stat.R 2 Coefficient of determination

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

QuartReg Catalog >

QuartReg X,Y[, Freq][, Category , Include ]]
Computes the quartic polynomial regression
y = a•x4+b•x3+c• x2+d•x+e on lists X and Y
with frequency Freq. A summary of results
is stored in the stat.results variable. (See
page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .

Alphabetical Listing 141

 QuartReg Catalog >
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a•x 4+b•x 3+c• x 2+d•x+e

stat.a, stat.b, Regression coefficients

stat.c, stat.d,
stat.e

stat.R 2 Coefficient of determination

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

R►Pθ() Catalog >

R►Pθ (xExpr, yExpr) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

R►Pθ (xList , yList ) ⇒ list

R►Pθ (xMatrix , yMatrix ) ⇒ matrix

142 Alphabetical Listing

R►Pθ() Catalog >
Returns the equivalent θ-coordinate of the
( x,y ) pair arguments. In Gradian angle mode:

Note: The result is returned as a degree,

gradian or radian angle, according to the
current angle mode setting.
Note: You can insert this function from the In Radian angle mode:
computer keyboard by typing R@>Ptheta
(...).

R►Pr() Catalog >

R►Pr (xExpr, yExpr) ⇒ expression In Radian angle mode:

R►Pr (xList , yList ) ⇒ list

R►Pr (xMatrix , yMatrix ) ⇒ matrix
Returns the equivalent r-coordinate of the
( x,y ) pair arguments.
Note: You can insert this function from the
computer keyboard by typing R@>Pr(...).

►Rad Catalog >

Expr1►Rad ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

Converts the argument to radian angle

measure.
Note: You can insert this operator from the In Gradian angle mode:
computer keyboard by typing @>Rad.

rand() Catalog >

rand() ⇒ expression Set the random-number seed.
rand(#Trials) ⇒ list

Alphabetical Listing 143

 rand() Catalog >
rand() returns a random value between 0
and 1.
rand( #Trials) returns a list containing
#Trials random values between 0 and 1.

randBin() Catalog >

randBin(n, p) ⇒ expression
randBin(n, p, #Trials) ⇒ list
randBin( n, p) returns a random real number
from a specified Binomial distribution.
randBin( n, p, #Trials) returns a list
containing #Trials random real numbers
from a specified Binomial distribution.

randInt() Catalog >

randInt
(lowBound,upBound)
⇒ expression
randInt
(lowBound,upBound
,#Trials) ⇒ list
randInt
( lowBound,upBound)
returns a random
integer within the
range specified by
lowBound and
upBound integer
bounds.
randInt
( lowBound,upBound
,#Trials) returns a
list containing
#Trials random
integers within the
specified range.

144 Alphabetical Listing

randMat() Catalog >
randMat(numRows, numColumns) ⇒
matrix
Returns a matrix of integers between -9
and 9 of the specified dimension.
Both arguments must simplify to integers. Note: The values in this matrix will change
each time you press ·.

randNorm() Catalog >

randNorm(μ, σ) ⇒ expression
randNorm(μ, σ, #Trials) ⇒ list
randNorm( μ, σ) returns a decimal number
from the specified normal distribution. It
could be any real number but will be heavily
concentrated in the interval [μ−3•σ, μ+3•σ].
randNorm( μ, σ, #Trials) returns a list
containing #Trials decimal numbers from
the specified normal distribution.

randPoly() Catalog >

randPoly(Var, Order) ⇒ expression
Returns a polynomial in Var of the
specified Order. The coefficients are
random integers in the range −9 through 9.
The leading coefficient will not be zero.
Order must be 0–99.

randSamp() Catalog >

randSamp(List ,#Trials[,noRepl ]) ⇒ list
Returns a list containing a random sample
of #Trials trials from List with an option
for sample replacement ( noRepl =0), or no
sample replacement ( noRepl =1). The
default is with sample replacement.

Alphabetical Listing 145

 RandSeed Catalog >
RandSeed Number
If Number = 0, sets the seeds to the factory
defaults for the random-number generator.
If Number ≠ 0, it is used to generate two
seeds, which are stored in system variables
seed1 and seed2.

real() Catalog >

real(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns the real part of the argument.
Note: All undefined variables are treated as
real variables. See also imag() , page 88.
real(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the real parts of all elements.
real(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
Returns the real parts of all elements.

►Rect Catalog >

Vector ►Rect
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>Rect.
Displays Vector in rectangular form [x, y,
z]. The vector must be of dimension 2 or 3
and can be a row or a column.
Note: ►Rect is a display-format instruction,
not a conversion function. You can use it
only at the end of an entry line, and it does
not update ans.
Note: See also ►Polar, page 133.
complexValue ►Rect In Radian angle mode:

Displays complexValue in rectangular form

a+bi. The complexValue can have any
complex form. However, an reiθ entry
causes an error in Degree angle mode.
Note: You must use parentheses for an
(r∠ θ) polar entry.

146 Alphabetical Listing

►Rect Catalog >

In Gradian angle mode:

In Degree angle mode:

Note: To type ∠ , select it from the symbol

list in the Catalog.

ref() Catalog >

ref(Matrix1[, Tol ]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the row echelon form of Matrix1.
Optionally, any matrix element is treated as
zero if its absolute value is less than Tol .
This tolerance is used only if the matrix has
floating-point entries and does not contain
any symbolic variables that have not been
assigned a value. Otherwise, Tol is ignored.

• If you use /· or set the Auto or

Approximate mode to Approximate,
computations are done using floating-
point arithmetic.
• If Tol is omitted or not used, the default
tolerance is calculated as:
5E −14 •max(dim(Matrix1)) •rowNorm
(Matrix1)
Avoid undefined elements in Matrix1. They
can lead to unexpected results.
For example, if a is undefined in the
following expression, a warning message
appears and the result is shown as:

Alphabetical Listing 147

 ref() Catalog >
The warning appears because the
generalized element 1/ a would not be valid
for a=0.
You can avoid this by storing a value to a
beforehand or by using the constraint (“|”)
operator to substitute a value, as shown in
the following example.

Note: See also rref() , page 156.

RefreshProbeVars Catalog >

RefreshProbeVars Example
Allows you to access sensor data from all Define temp()=
connected sensor probes in your TI-Basic
Prgm
program.
© Check if system is ready
StatusVar
Status RefreshProbeVars status
Value
statusVar Normal (continue with the If status=0 Then
=0 program)
The Vernier DataQuest™ Disp "ready"
application is in data collection For n,1,50
mode.
statusVar Note: The Vernier DataQuest™ RefreshProbeVars status
=1 application must be in meter temperature:=meter.temperature
mode for this command to work.
Disp "Temperature:
",temperature
statusVar The Vernier DataQuest™
=2 application is not launched. If temperature>30 Then

statusVar The Vernier DataQuest™ Disp "Too hot"

application is launched, but you
=3 EndIf
have not connected any probes.
© Wait for 1 second between
samples
Wait 1
EndFor

148 Alphabetical Listing

RefreshProbeVars Catalog >
Else
Disp "Not ready. Try again
later"
EndIf
EndPrgm

Note: This can also be used with TI-

Innovator™ Hub.

remain() Catalog >

remain(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression

remain(List1, List2) ⇒ list

remain(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix
Returns the remainder of the first
argument with respect to the second
argument as defined by the identities:
remain(x,0)   x
remain(x,y)   x−y•iPart(x/y)
As a consequence, note that remain( −x,y) −
remain( x,y) . The result is either zero or it
has the same sign as the first argument.
Note: See also mod() , page 116.

Request Catalog >

Request promptString, var[, DispFlag Define a program:
[, statusVar]] Define request_demo()=Prgm
    Request “Radius: ”,r
Request promptString, func (arg1, ...argn)     Disp “Area = “,pi*r2
[, DispFlag [, statusVar]] EndPrgm

Programming command: Pauses the

program and displays a dialog box Run the program and type a response:
containing the message promptString and
an input box for the user’s response. request_demo()

When the user types a response and clicks

OK, the contents of the input box are
assigned to variable var.

Alphabetical Listing 149

 Request Catalog >
If the user clicks Cancel, the program
proceeds without accepting any input. The
program uses the previous value of var if
var was already defined.
The optional DispFlag argument can be
any expression.
• If DispFlag is omitted or evaluates to 1, Result after selecting OK :
the prompt message and user’s response
Radius: 6/2
are displayed in the Calculator history. Area= 28.2743
• If DispFlag evaluates to 0, the prompt
and response are not displayed in the
history.
The optional statusVar argument gives the Define a program:
program a way to determine how the user Define polynomial()=Prgm
dismissed the dialog box. Note that     Request "Enter a polynomial in
statusVar requires the DispFlag argument. x:",p(x)
    Disp "Real roots are:",polyRoots
• If the user clicked OK or pressed Enter or (p(x),x)
EndPrgm
Ctrl+Enter, variable statusVar is set to a
value of 1.
• Otherwise, variable statusVar is set to a Run the program and type a response:
value of 0.
polynomial()
The func () argument allows a program to
store the user’s response as a function
definition. This syntax operates as if the
user executed the command:
     Define func ( arg1, ...argn) = user’s
response Result after entering x^3+3x+1 and selecting
OK :
The program can then use the defined
function func (). The promptString should Real roots are: {-0.322185}
guide the user to enter an appropriate
user’s response that completes the
function definition.
Note: You can use the Request command
within a user-defined program but not
within a function.
To stop a program that contains a Request
command inside an infinite loop:

• Handheld: Hold down the c key and

press · repeatedly.

150 Alphabetical Listing

Request Catalog >
• Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• Macintosh®: Hold down the F5 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• iPad®: The app displays a prompt. You
can continue waiting or cancel.
Note: See also RequestStr, page 151.

RequestStr Catalog >

RequestStr promptString, var[, DispFlag] Define a program:

Programming command: Operates Define requestStr_demo()=Prgm

    RequestStr “Your name:”,name,0
identically to the first syntax of the Request     Disp “Response has “,dim(name),”
command, except that the user’s response characters.”
is always interpreted as a string. By EndPrgm
contrast, the Request command interprets
the response as an expression unless the
user encloses it in quotation marks (““). Run the program and type a response:
requestStr_demo()
Note: You can use the RequestStr command
within a user-defined program but not
within a function.
To stop a program that contains a
RequestStr command inside an infinite loop:

• Handheld: Hold down the c key and

press · repeatedly.
• Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and
Result after selecting OK (Note that the
press Enter repeatedly.
DispFlag argument of 0 omits the prompt
• Macintosh®: Hold down the F5 key and and response from the history):
press Enter repeatedly.
• iPad®: The app displays a prompt. You
can continue waiting or cancel. requestStr_demo()
Response has 5 characters.
Note: See also Request, page 149.

Alphabetical Listing 151

 Return Catalog >
Return [Expr]
Returns Expr as the result of the function.
Use within a Func...EndFunc block.
Note: Use Return without an argument
within a Prgm...EndPrgm block to exit a
program.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

right() Catalog >

right(List1[, Num]) ⇒ list
Returns the rightmost Num elements
contained in List1.
If you omit Num, returns all of List1.
right(sourceString[, Num]) ⇒ string
Returns the rightmost Num characters
contained in character string sourceString.
If you omit Num, returns all of
sourceString.
right(Comparison) ⇒ expression
Returns the right side of an equation or
inequality.

rk23 () Catalog >

rk23(Expr, Var, depVar, {Var0, VarMax }, Differential equation:
depVar0, VarStep [, diftol ]) ⇒ matrix
y'=0.001*y*(100-y) and y(0)=10
rk23(SystemOfExpr, Var, ListOfDepVars,
{Var0, VarMax }, ListOfDepVars0,
VarStep[, diftol ]) ⇒ matrix
rk23(ListOfExpr, Var, ListOfDepVars,
{Var0, VarMax }, ListOfDepVars0, To see the entire result,
VarStep[, diftol ]) ⇒ matrix press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.

152 Alphabetical Listing

rk23 () Catalog >
Uses the Runge-Kutta method to solve the Same equation with diftol set to 1. E−6
system

with depVar( Var0)=depVar0 on the

interval [Var0,VarMax ]. Returns a matrix Compare above result with CAS exact
whose first row defines the Var output solution obtained using deSolve() and
values as defined by VarStep. The second seqGen():
row defines the value of the first solution
component at the corresponding Var
values, and so on.
Expr is the right hand side that defines the
ordinary differential equation (ODE).
SystemOfExpr is a system of right-hand
sides that define the system of ODEs
(corresponds to order of dependent
variables in ListOfDepVars).
System of equations:
ListOfExpr is a list of right-hand sides that
define the system of ODEs (corresponds to
order of dependent variables in
ListOfDepVars).
with y1(0)=2 and y2(0)=5
Var is the independent variable.
ListOfDepVars is a list of dependent
variables.
{Var0, VarMax } is a two-element list that
tells the function to integrate from Var0 to
VarMax .
ListOfDepVars0 is a list of initial values
for dependent variables.
If VarStep evaluates to a nonzero number:
sign( VarStep) = sign( VarMax -Var0) and
solutions are returned at Var0+i*VarStep
for all i=0,1,2,… such that Var0+i*VarStep
is in [var0,VarMax ] (may not get a solution
value at VarMax ).
if VarStep evaluates to zero, solutions are
returned at the "Runge-Kutta" Var values.
diftol is the error tolerance (defaults to
0.001).

Alphabetical Listing 153

 root() Catalog >
root(Expr) ⇒ root
root(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ root
root( Expr) returns the square root of Expr.
root( Expr1, Expr2) returns the Expr2 root
of Expr1. Expr1 can be a real or complex
floating point constant, an integer or
complex rational constant, or a general
symbolic expression.
Note: See also Nth root template, page 1.

rotate() Catalog >

rotate(Integer1[,#ofRotations]) ⇒ integer In Bin base mode:

Rotates the bits in a binary integer. You can

enter Integer1 in any number base; it is
converted automatically to a signed, 64-bit
binary form. If the magnitude of Integer1 is
too large for this form, a symmetric modulo
operation brings it within the range. For To see the entire result,
more information, see ►Base2, page 17. press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.
If #ofRotations is positive, the rotation is to In Hex base mode:
the left. If #ofRotations is negative, the
rotation is to the right. The default is −1
(rotate right one bit).
For example, in a right rotation:
Each bit rotates right. Important: To enter a binary or
hexadecimal number, always use the 0b or
0b00000000000001111010110000110101 0h prefix (zero, not the letter O).
Rightmost bit rotates to leftmost.
produces:
0b10000000000000111101011000011010
The result is displayed according to the
Base mode.
rotate(List1[,#ofRotations]) ⇒ list In Dec base mode:

Returns a copy of List1 rotated right or left

by #of Rotations elements. Does not alter
List1.

154 Alphabetical Listing

rotate() Catalog >
If #ofRotations is positive, the rotation is to
the left. If #of Rotations is negative, the
rotation is to the right. The default is −1
(rotate right one element).
rotate(String1[,#ofRotations]) ⇒ string
Returns a copy of String1 rotated right or
left by #ofRotations characters. Does not
alter String1.
If #ofRotations is positive, the rotation is to
the left. If #ofRotations is negative, the
rotation is to the right. The default is −1
(rotate right one character).

round() Catalog >

round(Expr1[, digits]) ⇒ expression
Returns the argument rounded to the
specified number of digits after the decimal
point.
digits must be an integer in the range 0–
12. If digits is not included, returns the
argument rounded to 12 significant digits.
Note: Display digits mode may affect how
this is displayed.
round(List1[, digits]) ⇒ list
Returns a list of the elements rounded to
the specified number of digits.
round(Matrix1[, digits]) ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix of the elements rounded
to the specified number of digits.

rowAdd() Catalog >

rowAdd(Matrix1, rIndex1, rIndex2) ⇒
matrix
Returns a copy of Matrix1 with row
rIndex2 replaced by the sum of rows
rIndex1 and rIndex2.

Alphabetical Listing 155

 rowDim() Catalog >
rowDim(Matrix ) ⇒ expression
Returns the number of rows in Matrix .
Note: See also colDim() , page 26.

rowNorm() Catalog >

rowNorm(Matrix ) ⇒ expression
Returns the maximum of the sums of the
absolute values of the elements in the rows
in Matrix .
Note: All matrix elements must simplify to
numbers. See also colNorm() , page 26.

rowSwap() Catalog >

rowSwap(Matrix1, rIndex1, rIndex2) ⇒
matrix
Returns Matrix1 with rows rIndex1 and
rIndex2 exchanged.

rref() Catalog >

rref(Matrix1[, Tol ]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the reduced row echelon form of
Matrix1.

Optionally, any matrix element is treated as

zero if its absolute value is less than Tol .
This tolerance is used only if the matrix has
floating-point entries and does not contain
any symbolic variables that have not been
assigned a value. Otherwise, Tol is ignored.

• If you use /· or set the Auto or

Approximate mode to Approximate,
computations are done using floating-
point arithmetic.

156 Alphabetical Listing

rref() Catalog >
• If Tol is omitted or not used, the default
tolerance is calculated as:
5E −14 •max(dim(Matrix1)) •rowNorm
(Matrix1)
Note: See also ref() , page 147.

sec() µ key
sec(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

sec(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the secant of Expr1 or returns a
list containing the secants of all elements
in List1.
Note: The argument is interpreted as a
degree, gradian or radian angle, according
to the current angle mode setting. You can
use °, G, or r to override the angle mode
temporarily.

sec ⁻¹() µ key

sec⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

sec⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the angle whose secant is Expr1 or
returns a list containing the inverse secants In Gradian angle mode:
of each element of List1.
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
gradian, or radian angle, according to the
current angle mode setting.
In Radian angle mode:
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arcsec(...).

Alphabetical Listing 157

 sech() Catalog >
sech(Expr1) ⇒ expression

sech(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the hyperbolic secant of Expr1 or
returns a list containing the hyperbolic
secants of the List1 elements.

sech⁻¹() Catalog >

sech⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Radian angle and Rectangular complex
mode:
sech⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the inverse hyperbolic secant of
Expr1 or returns a list containing the
inverse hyperbolic secants of each element
of List1.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arcsech(...).

Send Hub Menu

Send exprOrString1 [, exprOrString2] ... Example: Turn on the blue element of the
built-in RGB LED for 0.5 seconds.
Programming command: Sends one or
more TI-Innovator™ Hub commands to a
connected hub.
exprOrString must be a valid
TI-Innovator™ Hub Command. Typically, Example: Request the current value of the
exprOrString contains a "SET ..." command hub's built-in light-level sensor. A Get
to control a device or a "READ ..." command command retrieves the value and assigns it
to request data. to variable lightval.

The arguments are sent to the hub in

succession.
Note: You can use the Send command
within a user-defined program but not
within a function.
Example: Send a calculated frequency to the
Note: See also Get (page 77), GetStr (page hub's built-in speaker. Use special variable
84), and eval() (page 61). iostr.SendAns to show the hub command
with the expression evaluated.

158 Alphabetical Listing

Send Hub Menu

seq() Catalog >

seq(Expr, Var, Low, High[, Step]) ⇒ list
Increments Var from Low through High by
an increment of Step, evaluates Expr, and
returns the results as a list. The original
contents of Var are still there after seq() is
completed.
The default value for Step = 1. Note: To force an approximate result,

Handheld: Press / ·.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter .
Macintosh®: Press “+Enter .
iPad®: Hold enter , and select .

seqGen() Catalog >

seqGen(Expr, Var, depVar, {Var0, Generate the first 5 terms of the sequence u
VarMax }[, ListOfInitTerms (n ) = u (n -1)2/2, with u (1)=2 and VarStep =1.
[, VarStep[, CeilingValue ]]]) ⇒ list
Generates a list of terms for sequence
depVar(Var)=Expr as follows: Increments
independent variable Var from Var0
through VarMax by VarStep, evaluates
depVar(Var) for corresponding values of
Var using the Expr formula and
ListOfInitTerms, and returns the results as
a list. Example in which Var0=2:

seqGen(ListOrSystemOfExpr, Var,
ListOfDepVars, {Var0, VarMax } [
, MatrixOfInitTerms[, VarStep[,
CeilingValue ]]]) ⇒ matrix

Alphabetical Listing 159

 seqGen() Catalog >
Generates a matrix of terms for a system
(or list) of sequences ListOfDepVars( Var)
=ListOrSystemOfExpr as follows: Example in which initial term is symbolic:
Increments independent variable Var from
Var0 through VarMax by VarStep,
evaluates ListOfDepVars( Var) for
corresponding values of Var using
ListOrSystemOfExpr formula and System of two sequences:
MatrixOfInitTerms, and returns the results
as a matrix.
The original contents of Var are unchanged
after seqGen() is completed.
The default value for VarStep = 1.
Note: The Void (_) in the initial term matrix
above is used to indicate that the initial term
for u1(n) is calculated using the explicit
sequence formula u1(n)=1/n.

seqn() Catalog >

seqn(Expr(u, n[, ListOfInitTerms[, nMax [, Generate the first 6 terms of the sequence u
CeilingValue ]]]) ⇒ list (n ) = u (n -1)/2, with u (1)=2.

Generates a list of terms for a sequence u

( n)=Expr( u, n) as follows: Increments n
from 1 through nMax by 1, evaluates u( n)
for corresponding values of n using the
Expr(u, n) formula and ListOfInitTerms,
and returns the results as a list.
seqn(Expr(n[, nMax [, CeilingValue ]]) ⇒
list
Generates a list of terms for a non-
recursive sequence u( n)=Expr( n) as
follows: Increments n from 1 through nMax
by 1, evaluates u( n) for corresponding
values of n using the Expr( n) formula, and
returns the results as a list.
If nMax is missing, nMax is set to 2500
If nMax =0, nMax is set to 2500
Note: seqn() calls seqGen( ) with n0=1 and
nstep =1

160 Alphabetical Listing

series() Catalog >
series(Expr1, Var, Order[, Point ]) ⇒
expression
series(Expr1, Var, Order[, Point ]) |
Var>Point ⇒ expression
series(Expr1, Var, Order[, Point ]) |
Var<Point ⇒ expression

Returns a generalized truncated power

series representation of Expr1 expanded
about Point through degree Order. Order
can be any rational number. The resulting
powers of ( Var − Point ) can include
negative and/or fractional exponents. The
coefficients of these powers can include
logarithms of ( Var − Point ) and other
functions of Var that are dominated by all
powers of ( Var − Point ) having the same
exponent sign.
Point defaults to 0. Point can be ∞ or −∞,
in which cases the expansion is through
degree Order in 1/( Var − Point ).
series(...) returns “series(...) ” if it is unable
to determine such a representation, such as
for essential singularities such as sin(1/z)
at z=0, e−1/z at z=0, or ez at z = ∞ or −∞.
If the series or one of its derivatives has a
jump discontinuity at Point , the result is
likely to contain sub-expressions of the
form sign(…) or abs(…) for a real expansion
variable or (-1) floor(…angle(…)…) for a complex
expansion variable, which is one ending
with “_”. If you intend to use the series only
for values on one side of Point , then
append the appropriate one of “| Var >
Point ”, “| Var < Point ”, “| “Var ≥ Point ”,
or “Var ≤ Point ” to obtain a simpler result.
series() can provide symbolic
approximations to indefinite integrals and
definite integrals for which symbolic
solutions otherwise can't be obtained.

Alphabetical Listing 161

 series() Catalog >
series() distributes over 1st-argument lists
and matrices.
series() is a generalized version of taylor() .
As illustrated by the last example to the
right, the display routines downstream of
the result produced by series(...) might
rearrange terms so that the dominant term
is not the leftmost one.
Note: See also dominantTerm() , page 55.

setMode() Catalog >

setMode(modeNameInteger, Display approximate value of π using the
settingInteger) ⇒ integer default setting for Display Digits, and then
setMode(list ) ⇒ integer list display π with a setting of Fix2. Check to see
that the default is restored after the
Valid only within a function or program. program executes.
setMode( modeNameInteger,
settingInteger) temporarily sets mode
modeNameInteger to the new setting
settingInteger, and returns an integer
corresponding to the original setting of that
mode. The change is limited to the duration
of the program/function’s execution.
modeNameInteger specifies which mode
you want to set. It must be one of the mode
integers from the table below.
settingInteger specifies the new setting for
the mode. It must be one of the setting
integers listed below for the specific mode
you are setting.
setMode( list ) lets you change multiple
settings. list contains pairs of mode
integers and setting integers. setMode( list )
returns a similar list whose integer pairs
represent the original modes and settings.
If you have saved all mode settings with
getMode(0) →var, you can use setMode
( var) to restore those settings until the
function or program exits. See getMode() ,
page 83.

162 Alphabetical Listing

setMode() Catalog >
Note: The current mode settings are passed
to called subroutines. If any subroutine
changes a mode setting, the mode change
will be lost when control returns to the
calling routine.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

Mode Mode
Name Integer Setting Integers
Display 1 1=Float, 2=Float1, 3=Float2, 4=Float3, 5=Float4, 6=Float5,
Digits 7=Float6, 8=Float7, 9=Float8, 10=Float9, 11=Float10,
12=Float11, 13=Float12, 14=Fix0, 15=Fix1, 16=Fix2,
17=Fix3, 18=Fix4, 19=Fix5, 20=Fix6, 21=Fix7, 22=Fix8,
23=Fix9, 24=Fix10, 25=Fix11, 26=Fix12
Angle 2 1=Radian, 2=Degree, 3=Gradian
Exponential 3 1=Normal, 2=Scientific, 3=Engineering
Format
Real or 4 1=Real, 2=Rectangular, 3=Polar
Complex
Auto or 5 1=Auto, 2=Approximate, 3=Exact
Approx.
Vector 6 1=Rectangular, 2=Cylindrical, 3=Spherical
Format
Base 7 1=Decimal, 2=Hex, 3=Binary
Unit 8 1=SI, 2=Eng/US
system

shift() Catalog >

shift(Integer1[,#ofShifts]) ⇒ integer In Bin base mode:

Shifts the bits in a binary integer. You can

enter Integer1 in any number base; it is
converted automatically to a signed, 64-bit
binary form. If the magnitude of Integer1 is
too large for this form, a symmetric modulo
operation brings it within the range. For In Hex base mode:
more information, see ►Base2, page 17.

Alphabetical Listing 163

 shift() Catalog >
If #ofShifts is positive, the shift is to the
left. If #ofShifts is negative, the shift is to
the right. The default is −1 (shift right one
bit).
In a right shift, the rightmost bit is dropped Important: To enter a binary or
and 0 or 1 is inserted to match the leftmost hexadecimal number, always use the 0b or
bit. In a left shift, the leftmost bit is 0h prefix (zero, not the letter O).
dropped and 0 is inserted as the rightmost
bit.
For example, in a right shift:
Each bit shifts right.
0b0000000000000111101011000011010
Inserts 0 if leftmost bit is 0,
or 1 if leftmost bit is 1.
produces:
0b00000000000000111101011000011010
The result is displayed according to the
Base mode. Leading zeros are not shown.
shift(List1[,#ofShifts]) ⇒ list In Dec base mode:

Returns a copy of List1 shifted right or left

by #ofShifts elements. Does not alter List1.
If #ofShifts is positive, the shift is to the
left. If #ofShifts is negative, the shift is to
the right. The default is −1 (shift right one
element).
Elements introduced at the beginning or
end of list by the shift are set to the symbol
“undef”.
shift(String1[,#ofShifts]) ⇒ string
Returns a copy of String1 shifted right or
left by #ofShifts characters. Does not alter
String1.
If #ofShifts is positive, the shift is to the
left. If #ofShifts is negative, the shift is to
the right. The default is −1 (shift right one
character).

164 Alphabetical Listing

shift() Catalog >
Characters introduced at the beginning or
end of string by the shift are set to a space.

sign() Catalog >

sign(Expr1) ⇒ expression

sign(List1) ⇒ list
sign(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix
For real and complex Expr1, returns
Expr1/abs( Expr1) when Expr1≠ 0. If complex format mode is Real:

Returns 1 if Expr1 is positive. Returns −1 if

Expr1is negative.
sign(0) represents the unit circle in the
complex domain.
For a list or matrix, returns the signs of all
the elements.

simult() Catalog >

simult(coeffMatrix , constVector[, Tol ]) ⇒ Solve for x and y:
matrix x + 2y = 1
3x + 4y = −1
Returns a column vector that contains the
solutions to a system of linear equations.
Note: See also linSolve() , page 102.
coeffMatrix must be a square matrix that The solution is x=−3 and y=2.
contains the coefficients of the equations.
Solve:
constVector must have the same number
ax + by = 1
of rows (same dimension) as coeffMatrix
cx + dy = 2
and contain the constants.
Optionally, any matrix element is treated as
zero if its absolute value is less than Tol .
This tolerance is used only if the matrix has
floating-point entries and does not contain
any symbolic variables that have not been
assigned a value. Otherwise, Tol is ignored.
• If you set the Auto or Approximate mode
to Approximate, computations are done
using floating-point arithmetic.

Alphabetical Listing 165

 simult() Catalog >
• If Tol is omitted or not used, the default
tolerance is calculated as:
5E −14 •max(dim(coeffMatrix ))
•rowNorm(coeffMatrix )
simult(coeffMatrix , constMatrix [, Tol ]) ⇒ Solve:
matrix   x + 2y = 1
3x + 4y = −1
Solves multiple systems of linear equations,
where each system has the same equation   x + 2y = 2
coefficients but different constants. 3x + 4y = −3

Each column in constMatrix must contain

the constants for a system of equations.
Each column in the resulting matrix
contains the solution for the corresponding
system. For the first system, x=−3 and y=2. For the
second system, x=−7 and y=9/2.

►sin Catalog >

Expr►sin
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @>sin.
Represents Expr in terms of sine. This is a
display conversion operator. It can be used
only at the end of the entry line.
►sin reduces all powers of
    cos(...) modulo 1−sin(...)^2
so that any remaining powers of sin(...)
have exponents in the range (0, 2). Thus,
the result will be free of cos(...) if and only
if cos(...) occurs in the given expression only
to even powers.
Note: This conversion operator is not
supported in Degree or Gradian Angle
modes. Before using it, make sure that the
Angle mode is set to Radians and that Expr
does not contain explicit references to
degree or gradian angles.

sin() µ key
sin(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

166 Alphabetical Listing

sin() µ key
sin(List1) ⇒ list
sin( Expr1) returns the sine of the argument
as an expression.
sin( List1) returns a list of the sines of all
elements in List1.
Note: The argument is interpreted as a
degree, gradian or radian angle, according
to the current angle mode. You can use °, g, In Gradian angle mode:
or r to override the angle mode setting
temporarily.

In Radian angle mode:

sin(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix sine of squareMatrix1.

This is not the same as calculating the sine
of each element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

sin⁻¹() µ key
sin⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

sin⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
sin⁻¹( Expr1) returns the angle whose sine
is Expr1 as an expression. In Gradian angle mode:
sin⁻¹( List1) returns a list of the inverse
sines of each element of List1.
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
In Radian angle mode:
gradian or radian angle, according to the
current angle mode setting.

Alphabetical Listing 167

 sin⁻¹() µ key
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arcsin(...).
sin⁻¹(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode and Rectangular
complex format mode:
Returns the matrix inverse sine of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the inverse sine of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

sinh() Catalog >

sinh(Expr1) ⇒ expression

sinh(List1) ⇒ list
sinh ( Expr1) returns the hyperbolic sine of
the argument as an expression.
sinh ( List1) returns a list of the hyperbolic
sines of each element of List1.
sinh(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix hyperbolic sine of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the hyperbolic sine of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

sinh⁻¹() Catalog >

sinh⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression

sinh⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
sinh⁻¹( Expr1) returns the inverse hyperbolic
sine of the argument as an expression.
sinh⁻¹( List1) returns a list of the inverse
hyperbolic sines of each element of List1.

168 Alphabetical Listing

sinh⁻¹() Catalog >
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arcsinh(...).
sinh⁻¹(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic sine

of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the inverse hyperbolic sine of
each element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

SinReg Catalog >

SinReg X, Y[, [Iterations],[Period][,
Category , Include ]]
Computes the sinusoidal regression on lists
X and Y. A summary of results is stored in
the stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.
Iterations is a value that specifies the
maximum number of times (1 through 16) a
solution will be attempted. If omitted, 8 is
used. Typically, larger values result in better
accuracy but longer execution times, and
vice versa.
Period specifies an estimated period. If
omitted, the difference between values in X
should be equal and in sequential order. If
you specify Period, the differences between
x values can be unequal.
Category is a list of category codes for the
corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.

Alphabetical Listing 169

 SinReg Catalog >
The output of SinReg is always in radians,
regardless of the angle mode setting.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output
Description
variable
stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: a•sin(bx+c)+d

stat.a, stat.b, Regression coefficients

stat.c, stat.d

stat.Resid Residuals from the regression

stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on
restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories

stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.YReg

solve() Catalog >

solve(Equation, Var) ⇒ Boolean
expression
solve(Equation, Var=Guess) ⇒ Boolean
expression
solve(Inequality , Var) ⇒ Boolean
expression
Returns candidate real solutions of an
equation or an inequality for Var. The goal
is to return candidates for all solutions.
However, there might be equations or
inequalities for which the number of
solutions is infinite.
Solution candidates might not be real finite
solutions for some combinations of values
for undefined variables.

170 Alphabetical Listing

solve() Catalog >
For the Auto setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode, the goal is to produce
exact solutions when they are concise, and
supplemented by iterative searches with
approximate arithmetic when exact
solutions are impractical.
Due to default cancellation of the greatest
common divisor from the numerator and
denominator of ratios, solutions might be
solutions only in the limit from one or both
sides.
For inequalities of types ≥, ≤, <, or >,
explicit solutions are unlikely unless the
inequality is linear and contains only Var.
For the Exact mode, portions that cannot be
solved are returned as an implicit equation
or inequality.
Use the constraint (“|”) operator to restrict In Radian angle mode:
the solution interval and/or other variables
that occur in the equation or inequality.
When you find a solution in one interval,
you can use the inequality operators to
exclude that interval from subsequent
searches.
false is returned when no real solutions are
found. true is returned if solve() can
determine that any finite real value of Var
satisfies the equation or inequality.
Since solve() always returns a Boolean
result, you can use “and,” “or,” and “not” to
combine results from solve() with each
other or with other Boolean expressions.
Solutions might contain a unique new In Radian angle mode:
undefined constant of the form nj with j
being an integer in the interval 1–255. Such
variables designate an arbitrary integer.

Alphabetical Listing 171

 solve() Catalog >
In Real mode, fractional powers having odd
denominators denote only the real branch.
Otherwise, multiple branched expressions
such as fractional powers, logarithms, and
inverse trigonometric functions denote only
the principal branch. Consequently, solve()
produces only solutions corresponding to
that one real or principal branch.
Note: See also cSolve() , cZeros() , nSolve() ,
and zeros() .
solve(Eqn1 and Eqn2[and …],
VarOrGuess1, VarOrGuess2[, …])
⇒ Boolean expression
solve(SystemOfEqns, VarOrGuess1,
VarOrGuess2[, …])
⇒ Boolean expression
solve({Eqn1, Eqn2 [,...]}
{VarOrGuess1,VarOrGuess2 [, … ]})
⇒ Boolean expression
Returns candidate real solutions to the
simultaneous algebraic equations, where
each VarOrGuess specifies a variable that
you want to solve for.
You can separate the equations with the
and operator, or you can enter a
SystemOfEqns using a template from the
Catalog. The number of VarOrGuess
arguments must match the number of
equations. Optionally, you can specify an
initial guess for a variable. Each
VarOrGuess must have the form:
variable
– or –
variable = real or non-real number
For example, x is valid and so is x=3.

172 Alphabetical Listing

solve() Catalog >
If all of the equations are polynomials and
if you do NOT specify any initial guesses,
solve() uses the lexical Gröbner/Buchberger
elimination method to attempt to
determine all real solutions.
For example, suppose you have a circle of
radius r at the origin and another circle of
radius r centered where the first circle
crosses the positive x-axis. Use solve() to
find the intersections.
As illustrated by r in the example to the
right, simultaneous polynomial equations
can have extra variables that have no
values, but represent given numeric values
that could be substituted later.
You can also (or instead) include solution
variables that do not appear in the
equations. For example, you can include z
as a solution variable to extend the previous
example to two parallel intersecting
cylinders of radius r. To see the entire result,
press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
The cylinder solutions illustrate how cursor.
families of solutions might contain arbitrary
constants of the form ck , where k is an
integer suffix from 1 through 255.
For polynomial systems, computation time
or memory exhaustion may depend strongly
on the order in which you list solution
variables. If your initial choice exhausts
memory or your patience, try rearranging
the variables in the equations and/or
varOrGuess list.
If you do not include any guesses and if any
equation is non-polynomial in any variable
but all equations are linear in the solution
variables, solve() uses Gaussian elimination
to attempt to determine all real solutions.

Alphabetical Listing 173

 solve() Catalog >
If a system is neither polynomial in all of its
variables nor linear in its solution variables,
solve() determines at most one solution
using an approximate iterative method. To
do so, the number of solution variables To see the entire result,
must equal the number of equations, and press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
all other variables in the equations must cursor.
simplify to numbers.
Each solution variable starts at its guessed
value if there is one; otherwise, it starts at
0.0.
Use guesses to seek additional solutions
one by one. For convergence, a guess may
have to be rather close to a solution.

SortA Catalog >

SortA List1[, List2] [, List3]...
SortA Vector1[, Vector2] [, Vector3]...
Sorts the elements of the first argument in
ascending order.
If you include additional arguments, sorts
the elements of each so that their new
positions match the new positions of the
elements in the first argument.
All arguments must be names of lists or
vectors. All arguments must have equal
dimensions.
Empty (void) elements within the first
argument move to the bottom. For more
information on empty elements, see page
251.

174 Alphabetical Listing

SortD Catalog >
SortD List1[, List2][, List3]...
SortD Vector1[,Vector2][,Vector3]...
Identical to SortA, except SortD sorts the
elements in descending order.
Empty (void) elements within the first
argument move to the bottom. For more
information on empty elements, see page
251.

►Sphere Catalog >

Vector►Sphere Note: To force an approximate result,

Note: You can insert this operator from the Handheld: Press / ·.
computer keyboard by typing @>Sphere. Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter .
Macintosh®: Press “+Enter .
Displays the row or column vector in
iPad®: Hold enter , and select .
spherical form [ρ∠ θ∠ φ].
Vector must be of dimension 3 and can be
either a row or a column vector.
Note: ►Sphere is a display-format
instruction, not a conversion function. You
can use it only at the end of an entry line.

Press ·

Alphabetical Listing 175

 ►Sphere Catalog >

sqrt() Catalog >

sqrt(Expr1) ⇒ expression

sqrt(List1) ⇒ list
Returns the square root of the argument.
For a list, returns the square roots of all the
elements in List1.
Note: See also Square root template, page
1.

stat.results Catalog >

stat.results
Displays results from a statistics
calculation.
The results are displayed as a set of name-
value pairs. The specific names shown are
dependent on the most recently evaluated
statistics function or command.
You can copy a name or value and paste it
into other locations.

Note: Avoid defining variables that use the

same names as those used for statistical
analysis. In some cases, an error condition
could occur. Variable names used for
statistical analysis are listed in the table
below.

176 Alphabetical Listing

stat.a stat.dfDenom stat.MedianY stat.Q3X stat.SSBlock
stat.AdjR² stat.dfBlock stat.MEPred stat.Q3Y stat.SSCol
stat.b stat.dfCol stat.MinX stat.r stat.SSX
stat.b0 stat.dfError stat.MinY stat.r² stat.SSY
stat.b1 stat.dfInteract stat.MS stat.RegEqn stat.SSError
stat.b2 stat.dfReg stat.MSBlock stat.Resid stat.SSInteract
stat.b3 stat.dfNumer stat.MSCol stat.ResidTrans stat.SSReg
stat.b4 stat.dfRow stat.MSError stat.σx stat.SSRow
stat.b5 stat.DW stat.MSInteract stat.σy stat.tList
stat.b6 stat.e stat.MSReg stat.σx1 stat.UpperPred
stat.b7 stat.ExpMatrix stat.MSRow stat.σx2 stat.UpperVal
stat.b8 stat.F stat.n stat.Σx stat.v
stat.b9 stat.FBlock Stat.Ç stat.Σx² stat.v 1
stat.b10 stat.Fcol stat.Ç1 stat.Σxy stat.v 2
stat.bList stat.FInteract stat.Ç2 stat.Σy stat.v Diff
stat.χ² stat.FreqReg stat.ÇDiff stat.Σy² stat.v List
stat.c stat.Frow stat.PList stat.s stat.XReg
stat.CLower stat.Leverage stat.PVal stat.SE stat.XVal
stat.CLowerList stat.LowerPred stat.PValBlock stat.SEList stat.XValList
stat.CompList stat.LowerVal stat.PValCol stat.SEPred stat.w
stat.CompMatrix stat.m stat.PValInteract stat.sResid stat.y
stat.CookDist stat.MaxX stat.PValRow stat.SEslope
stat.yList
stat.CUpper stat.MaxY stat.Q1X stat.sp
stat.YReg
stat.CUpperList stat.ME stat.Q1Y stat.SS
stat.d stat.MedianX

Note: Each time the Lists & Spreadsheet application calculates statistical results, it
copies the “stat.” group variables to a “stat#.” group, where # is a number that is
incremented automatically. This lets you maintain previous results while
performing multiple calculations.

stat.values Catalog >

stat.values See the stat.results example.

Displays a matrix of the values calculated for

the most recently evaluated statistics
function or command.
Unlike stat.results , stat.values omits the
names associated with the values.
You can copy a value and paste it into other
locations.

Alphabetical Listing 177

 stDevPop() Catalog >
stDevPop(List [, freqList ]) ⇒ expression In Radian angle and auto modes:

Returns the population standard deviation

of the elements in List .
Each freqList element counts the number
of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in List .
Note:List must have at least two elements.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.
stDevPop(Matrix1[, freqMatrix ]) ⇒
matrix
Returns a row vector of the population
standard deviations of the columns in
Matrix1.
Each freqMatrix element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in Matrix1.
Note:Matrix1must have at least two rows.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.

stDevSamp() Catalog >

stDevSamp(List [, freqList ]) ⇒ expression
Returns the sample standard deviation of
the elements in List .
Each freqList element counts the number
of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in List .
Note:List must have at least two elements.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.

178 Alphabetical Listing

stDevSamp() Catalog >
stDevSamp(Matrix1[, freqMatrix ]) ⇒
matrix
Returns a row vector of the sample
standard deviations of the columns in
Matrix1.
Each freqMatrix element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in Matrix1.
Note:Matrix1must have at least two rows.
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.

Stop Catalog >

Stop
Programming command: Terminates the
program.
Stop is not allowed in functions.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

Store See →(store), page 233.

string() Catalog >

string(Expr) ⇒ string
Simplifies Expr and returns the result as a
character string.

Alphabetical Listing 179

 subMat() Catalog >
subMat(Matrix1[, startRow][, startCol ][,
endRow][, endCol ]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the specified submatrix of Matrix1.
Defaults: startRow=1, startCol =1,
endRow=last row, endCol =last column.

Sum (Sigma) See Σ(), page 224.

sum() Catalog >

sum(List [, Start [, End]]) ⇒ expression
Returns the sum of all elements in List .
Start and End are optional. They specify a
range of elements.
Any void argument produces a void result.
Empty (void) elements in List are ignored.
For more information on empty elements,
see page 251.
sum(Matrix1[, Start [, End]]) ⇒ matrix
Returns a row vector containing the sums
of all elements in the columns in Matrix1.
Start and End are optional. They specify a
range of rows.
Any void argument produces a void result.
Empty (void) elements in Matrix1 are
ignored. For more information on empty
elements, see page 251.

sumIf() Catalog >

sumIf(List ,Criteria[, SumList ]) ⇒ value
Returns the accumulated sum of all
elements in List that meet the specified
Criteria. Optionally, you can specify an
alternate list, sumList , to supply the
elements to accumulate.

180 Alphabetical Listing

sumIf() Catalog >
List can be an expression, list, or matrix.
SumList , if specified, must have the same
dimension(s) as List .
Criteria can be:
• A value, expression, or string. For
example, 34 accumulates only those
elements in List that simplify to the
value 34.
• A Boolean expression containing the
symbol ? as a placeholder for each
element. For example, ?<10 accumulates
only those elements in List that are less
than 10.
When a List element meets the Criteria,
the element is added to the accumulating
sum. If you include sumList , the
corresponding element from sumList is
added to the sum instead.
Within the Lists & Spreadsheet application,
you can use a range of cells in place of List
and sumList .
Empty (void) elements are ignored. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.
Note: See also countIf() , page 35.

sumSeq() See Σ(), page 224.

system() Catalog >

system(Eqn1[, Eqn2[, Eqn3[, ...]]])
system(Expr1[, Expr2[, Expr3[, ...]]])
Returns a system of equations, formatted
as a list. You can also create a system by
using a template.
Note: See also System of equations , page 3.

Alphabetical Listing 181

T

T (transpose) Catalog >

Matrix1T ⇒ matrix
Returns the complex conjugate transpose of
Matrix1.
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @t.

tan() µ key
tan(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

tan(List1) ⇒ list
tan( Expr1) returns the tangent of the
argument as an expression.
tan( List1) returns a list of the tangents of
all elements in List1.
In Gradian angle mode:
Note: The argument is interpreted as a
degree, gradian or radian angle, according
to the current angle mode. You can use °, g
or r to override the angle mode setting
temporarily.

In Radian angle mode:

tan(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix tangent of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the tangent of each element.
For information about the calculation
method, refer to cos() .

182 Alphabetical Listing

tan() µ key
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

tan⁻¹() µ key
tan⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

tan⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
tan⁻¹( Expr1) returns the angle whose
tangent is Expr1 as an expression. In Gradian angle mode:
tan⁻¹( List1) returns a list of the inverse
tangents of each element of List1.
Note: The result is returned as a degree,
gradian or radian angle, according to the In Radian angle mode:
current angle mode setting.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arctan(...).
tan⁻¹(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix inverse tangent of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the inverse tangent of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

tangentLine() Catalog >

tangentLine(Expr1,Var,Point ) ⇒
expression
tangentLine(Expr1,Var=Point ) ⇒
expression
Returns the tangent line to the curve
represented by Expr1 at the point specified
in Var=Point .

Alphabetical Listing 183

 tangentLine() Catalog >
Make sure that the independent variable is
not defined. For example, If f1(x):=5 and
x:=3, then tangentLine( f1(x),x,2) returns
“false.”

tanh() Catalog >

tanh(Expr1) ⇒ expression
tanh(List1) ⇒ list
tanh( Expr1) returns the hyperbolic tangent
of the argument as an expression.
tanh( List1) returns a list of the hyperbolic
tangents of each element of List1.
tanh(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode:

Returns the matrix hyperbolic tangent of

squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the hyperbolic tangent of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

tanh⁻¹() Catalog >

tanh⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression In Rectangular complex format:

tanh⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list
tanh⁻¹( Expr1) returns the inverse
hyperbolic tangent of the argument as an
expression.
tanh⁻¹( List1) returns a list of the inverse
hyperbolic tangents of each element of
List1.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing arctanh(...).
tanh⁻¹(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode and Rectangular
complex format:

184 Alphabetical Listing

tanh⁻¹() Catalog >
Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic
tangent of squareMatrix1. This is not the
same as calculating the inverse hyperbolic
tangent of each element. For information
about the calculation method, refer to cos
() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point To see the entire result,
numbers. press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.

taylor() Catalog >

taylor(Expr1, Var, Order[, Point ]) ⇒
expression
Returns the requested Taylor polynomial.
The polynomial includes non-zero terms of
integer degrees from zero through Order in
( Var minus Point ). taylor() returns itself if
there is no truncated power series of this
order, or if it would require negative or
fractional exponents. Use substitution
and/or temporary multiplication by a power
of ( Var minus Point ) to determine more
general power series.
Point defaults to zero and is the expansion
point.

tCdf() Catalog >

tCdf(lowBound,upBound,df ) ⇒ number if
lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if
lowBound and upBound are lists
Computes the Student-t distribution
probability between lowBound and upBound
for the specified degrees of freedom df .
For P(X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = ⁻∞.

Alphabetical Listing 185

 tCollect() Catalog >
tCollect(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns an expression in which products
and integer powers of sines and cosines are
converted to a linear combination of sines
and cosines of multiple angles, angle sums,
and angle differences. The transformation
converts trigonometric polynomials into a
linear combination of their harmonics.
Sometimes tCollect() will accomplish your
goals when the default trigonometric
simplification does not. tCollect() tends to
reverse transformations done by tExpand() .
Sometimes applying tExpand() to a result
from tCollect() , or vice versa, in two
separate steps simplifies an expression.

tExpand() Catalog >

tExpand(Expr1) ⇒ expression
Returns an expression in which sines and
cosines of integer-multiple angles, angle
sums, and angle differences are expanded.
Because of the identity (sin(x))2+(cos(x))
2=1, there are many possible equivalent
results. Consequently, a result might differ
from a result shown in other publications.
Sometimes tExpand() will accomplish your
goals when the default trigonometric
simplification does not. tExpand() tends to
reverse transformations done by tCollect() .
Sometimes applying tCollect() to a result
from tExpand() , or vice versa, in two
separate steps simplifies an expression.
Note: Degree-mode scaling by π/180
interferes with the ability of tExpand() to
recognize expandable forms. For best
results, tExpand() should be used in Radian
mode.

186 Alphabetical Listing

Text Catalog >
TextpromptString[, DispFlag] Define a program that pauses to display
each of five random numbers in a dialog
Programming command: Pauses the box.
program and displays the character string
promptString in a dialog box. Within the Prgm...EndPrgm template,
complete each line by pressing @ instead
When the user selects OK, program
of ·. On the computer keyboard, hold
execution continues.
down Alt and press Enter .
The optional flag argument can be any
expression.
Define text_demo()=Prgm
• If DispFlag is omitted or evaluates to 1,   For i,1,5
the text message is added to the     strinfo:=”Random number “ &
string(rand(i))
Calculator history.     Text strinfo
• If DispFlag evaluates to 0, the text   EndFor
EndPrgm
message is not added to the history.
If the program needs a typed response from
the user, refer to Request, page 149, or Run the program:
RequestStr, page 151. text_demo()

Note: You can use this command within a

user-defined program but not within a
function. Sample of one dialog box:

Then See If, page 86.

tInterval Catalog >

tInterval List [, Freq[, CLevel ]]
(Data list input)
tInterval v, sx , n[, CLevel ]
(Summary stats input)
Computes a t confidence interval. A
summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)

Alphabetical Listing 187

 tInterval Catalog >
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, stat.CUpper Confidence interval for an unknown population mean

stat. v Sample mean of the data sequence from the normal random distribution

stat.ME Margin of error

stat.df Degrees of freedom

stat. σx Sample standard deviation

stat.n Length of the data sequence with sample mean

tInterval_2Samp Catalog >

tInterval_2Samp List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2
[,CLevel [,Pooled]]]]
(Data list input)
tInterval_2Samp v 1,sx1,n1,v 2,sx2,n2
[,CLevel [,Pooled]]
(Summary stats input)
Computes a two-sample t confidence
interval. A summary of results is stored in
the stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
Pooled=1 pools variances; Pooled=0 does
not pool variances.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, Confidence interval containing confidence level probability of distribution
stat.CUpper

stat. v1-v2 Sample means of the data sequences from the normal random
distribution

stat.ME Margin of error

stat.df Degrees of freedom

188 Alphabetical Listing

Output variable Description
stat. v1, stat. v2 Sample means of the data sequences from the normal random
distribution

stat. σx1, stat. σx2 Sample standard deviations for List 1 and List 2

stat.n1, stat.n2 Number of samples in data sequences

stat.sp The pooled standard deviation. Calculated when Pooled  = YES

tmpCnv() Catalog >

tmpCnv(Expr_°tempUnit , _°tempUnit2)
⇒ expression _°tempUnit2
Converts a temperature value specified by
Expr from one unit to another. Valid
temperature units are:
Note: You can use the Catalog to select
_°C Celsius temperature units.
_°F Fahrenheit
_°K Kelvin
_°R Rankine
To type °, select it from the Catalog
symbols.

to type _ , press /_.

For example, 100_°C converts to 212_°F.
To convert a temperature range, use
ΔtmpCnv() instead.

ΔtmpCnv() Catalog >

ΔtmpCnv(Expr_°tempUnit , _°tempUnit2)
⇒ expression _°tempUnit2
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing deltaTmpCnv(...).
Converts a temperature range (the
difference between two temperature
Note: You can use the Catalog to select
values) specified by Expr from one unit to
temperature units.
another. Valid temperature units are:
_°C Celsius
_°F Fahrenheit
_°K Kelvin
_°R Rankine

Alphabetical Listing 189

 ΔtmpCnv() Catalog >
To enter °, select it from the Symbol
Palette or type @d.

To type _ , press /_.

1_°C and 1_°K have the same magnitude,
as do 1_°F and 1_°R. However, 1_°C is 9/5
as large as 1_°F.
For example, a 100_°C range (from 0_°C to
100_°C) is equivalent to a 180_°F range.
To convert a particular temperature value
instead of a range, use tmpCnv() .

tPdf() Catalog >

tPdf(XVal ,df ) ⇒ number if XVal is a
number, list if XVal is a list
Computes the probability density function
(pdf) for the Student-t distribution at a
specified x value with specified degrees of
freedom df .

trace() Catalog >

trace(squareMatrix ) ⇒ expression
Returns the trace (sum of all the elements
on the main diagonal) of squareMatrix .

190 Alphabetical Listing

Try Catalog >
Try
     block1
Else
     block2
EndTry
Executes block1 unless an error occurs.
Program execution transfers to block2 if an
error occurs in block1. System variable
errCode contains the error code to allow
the program to perform error recovery. For
a list of error codes, see “Error codes and
messages,” page 261.
block1 and block2 can be either a single
statement or a series of statements
separated with the “:” character.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.
To see the commands Try, ClrErr, and Define eigenvals(a,b)=Prgm
PassErr in operation, enter the eigenvals() © Program eigenvals(A,B) displays
program shown at the right. Run the eigenvalues of A•B
program by executing each of the following
expressions. Try
    Disp "A= ",a
    Disp "B= ",b
    Disp " "

    Disp "Eigenvalues of A•B are:",eigVl(a*b)

Else
    If errCode=230 Then
        Disp "Error: Product of A•B must be a
square matrix"
Note: See also ClrErr, page 25, and PassErr,
        ClrErr
page 131.
    Else
        PassErr
    EndIf
EndTry

EndPrgm

Alphabetical Listing 191

 tTest Catalog >
tTest μ0,List [,Freq[,Hypoth]]
(Data list input)
tTest μ0,v,sx ,n,[Hypoth]
(Summary stats input)
Performs a hypothesis test for a single
unknown population mean μ when the
population standard deviation σ is unknown.
A summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
Test H : μ = μ0, against one of the
0
following:
For H : μ < μ0, set Hypoth<0
a
For H : μ ≠ μ0 (default), set Hypoth=0
a
For H : μ > μ0, set Hypoth>0
a
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.t (v − μ0) / (stdev / sqrt(n))

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom

stat. v Sample mean of the data sequence in List

stat.sx Sample standard deviation of the data sequence

stat.n Size of the sample

tTest_2Samp Catalog >

tTest_2Samp List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2
[,Hypoth[,Pooled]]]]
(Data list input)
tTest_2Samp v 1,sx1,n1,v 2,sx2,n2[,Hypoth
[,Pooled]]
(Summary stats input)

192 Alphabetical Listing

tTest_2Samp Catalog >
Computes a two-sample t test. A summary
of results is stored in the stat.results
variable. (See page 176.)
Test H : μ1 = μ2, against one of the
0
following:
For H : μ1< μ2, set Hypoth<0
a
For H : μ1≠ μ2 (default), set Hypoth=0
a
For H : μ1> μ2, set Hypoth>0
a
Pooled=1 pools variances
Pooled=0 does not pool variances
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.t Standard normal value computed for the difference of means

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat.df Degrees of freedom for the t-statistic

stat. v1, stat. v2 Sample means of the data sequences in List 1 and List 2

stat.sx1, stat.sx2 Sample standard deviations of the data sequences in List 1 and List 2

stat.n1, stat.n2 Size of the samples

stat.sp The pooled standard deviation. Calculated when Pooled =1.

tvmFV() Catalog >

tvmFV(N,I,PV,Pmt ,[PpY],[CpY],[PmtAt ])
⇒ value
Financial function that calculates the future
value of money.
Note: Arguments used in the TVM functions
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 195. See also amortTbl() ,
page 8.

tvmI() Catalog >

tvmI(N,PV,Pmt ,FV,[PpY],[CpY],[PmtAt ])
⇒ value

Alphabetical Listing 193

 tvmI() Catalog >
Financial function that calculates the
interest rate per year.
Note: Arguments used in the TVM functions
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 195. See also amortTbl() ,
page 8.

tvmN() Catalog >

tvmN(I,PV,Pmt ,FV,[PpY],[CpY],[PmtAt ])
⇒ value
Financial function that calculates the
number of payment periods.
Note: Arguments used in the TVM functions
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 195. See also amortTbl() ,
page 8.

tvmPmt() Catalog >

tvmPmt(N,I,PV,FV,[PpY],[CpY],[PmtAt ])
⇒ value
Financial function that calculates the
amount of each payment.
Note: Arguments used in the TVM functions
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 195. See also amortTbl() ,
page 8.

tvmPV() Catalog >

tvmPV(N,I,Pmt ,FV,[PpY],[CpY],[PmtAt ])
⇒ value
Financial function that calculates the
present value.
Note: Arguments used in the TVM functions
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 195. See also amortTbl() ,
page 8.

194 Alphabetical Listing

 TVM Description Data type
argument*
N Number of payment periods real number
I Annual interest rate real number
PV Present value real number
Pmt Payment amount real number
FV Future value real number
PpY Payments per year, default=1 integer > 0
CpY Compounding periods per year, default=1 integer > 0
PmtAt Payment due at the end or beginning of each period, integer (0=end,
default=end 1=beginning)

* These time-value-of-money argument names are similar to the TVM variable names
(such as tvm.pv and tvm.pmt) that are used by the Calculator application’s finance
solver. Financial functions, however, do not store their argument values or results to
the TVM variables.

TwoVar Catalog >

TwoVar X, Y[, [Freq][, Category , Include ]]
Calculates the TwoVar statistics. A summary
of results is stored in the stat.results
variable. (See page 176.)
All the lists must have equal dimension
except for Include .
X and Y are lists of independent and
dependent variables.
Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Each element in Freq specifies the
frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding X and Y data point. The
default value is 1. All elements must be
integers ≥ 0.
Category is a list of numeric category codes
for the corresponding X and Y data.
Include is a list of one or more of the
category codes. Only those data items
whose category code is included in this list
are included in the calculation.

Alphabetical Listing 195

 TwoVar Catalog >
An empty (void) element in any of the lists
X, Freq, or Category results in a void for
the corresponding element of all those lists.
An empty element in any of the lists X1
through X20 results in a void for the
corresponding element of all those lists. For
more information on empty elements, see
page 251.

Output variable Description

stat. v Mean of x values

stat. Σ x Sum of x values

stat. Σ x2 Sum of x2 values

stat.sx Sample standard deviation of x

stat. σx Population standard deviation of x

stat.n Number of data points

stat. w Mean of y values

stat. Σ y Sum of y values

stat. Σ y2 Sum of y2 values

stat.sy Sample standard deviation of y

stat. σy Population standard deviation of y

stat. Σ xy Sum of x •y values

stat.r Correlation coefficient

stat.MinX Minimum of x values

stat.Q X 1st Quartile of x

1
stat.MedianX Median of x

stat.Q X 3rd Quartile of x

3
stat.MaxX Maximum of x values

stat.MinY Minimum of y values

stat.Q Y 1st Quartile of y

1
stat.MedY Median of y

stat.Q Y 3rd Quartile of y

3

196 Alphabetical Listing

Output variable Description
stat.MaxY Maximum of y values

stat. Σ (x-v)2 Sum of squares of deviations from the mean of x

stat. Σ (y-w)2 Sum of squares of deviations from the mean of y

unitV() Catalog >

unitV(Vector1) ⇒ vector
Returns either a row- or column-unit vector,
depending on the form of Vector1.
Vector1 must be either a single-row matrix
or a single-column matrix.

To see the entire result,

press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.

unLock Catalog >

unLock Var1[, Var2] [, Var3] ...
unLock Var.
Unlocks the specified variables or variable
group. Locked variables cannot be modified
or deleted.
See Lock, page 106, and getLockInfo() , page
82.

Alphabetical Listing 197

V

varPop() Catalog >

varPop(List [, freqList ]) ⇒ expression
Returns the population variance of List .
Each freqList element counts the number
of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in List .
Note: List must contain at least two
elements.
If an element in either list is empty (void),
that element is ignored, and the
corresponding element in the other list is
also ignored. For more information on
empty elements, see page 251.

varSamp() Catalog >

varSamp(List [, freqList ]) ⇒ expression
Returns the sample variance of List .
Each freqList element counts the number
of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in List .
Note: List must contain at least two
elements.
If an element in either list is empty (void),
that element is ignored, and the
corresponding element in the other list is
also ignored. For more information on
empty elements, see page 251.
varSamp(Matrix1[, freqMatrix ]) ⇒
matrix
Returns a row vector containing the sample
variance of each column in Matrix1.
Each freqMatrix element counts the
number of consecutive occurrences of the
corresponding element in Matrix1.

198 Alphabetical Listing

varSamp() Catalog >
If an element in either matrix is empty
(void), that element is ignored, and the
corresponding element in the other matrix
is also ignored. For more information on
empty elements, see page 251.
Note: Matrix1 must contain at least two
rows.

Wait Catalog >

Wait timeInSeconds To wait 4 seconds:

Suspends execution for a period of Wait 4

timeInSeconds seconds.
Wait is particularly useful in a program that To wait 1/2 second:
needs a brief delay to allow requested data Wait 0.5
to become available.
The argument timeInSeconds must be an To wait 1.3 seconds using the variable
expression that simplifies to a decimal value seccount:
in the range 0 through 100. The command seccount:=1.3
rounds this value up to the nearest 0.1 Wait seccount
seconds.
To cancel a Wait that is in progress, This example switches a green LED on for
0.5 seconds and then switches it off.
• Handheld: Hold down the c key and
Send "SET GREEN 1 ON"
press · repeatedly. Wait 0.5
Send "SET GREEN 1 OFF" 
• Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• Macintosh®: Hold down the F5 key and
press Enter repeatedly.
• iPad®: The app displays a prompt. You can
continue waiting or cancel.
Note: You can use the Wait command within
a user-defined program but not within a
function.

Alphabetical Listing 199

 warnCodes () Catalog >
warnCodes(Expr1, StatusVar) ⇒
expression
Evaluates expression Expr1, returns the
result, and stores the codes of any
generated warnings in the StatusVar list
variable. If no warnings are generated, this
function assigns StatusVar an empty list. To see the entire result,
press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
Expr1 can be any valid TI-Nspire™ or cursor.
TI-Nspire™ CAS math expression. You
cannot use a command or assignment as
Expr1.
StatusVar must be a valid variable name.
For a list of warning codes and associated
messages, see page 269.

when() Catalog >

when(Condition, trueResult [, falseResult ]
[, unknownResult ]) ⇒ expression
Returns trueResult , falseResult , or
unknownResult , depending on whether
Condition is true, false, or unknown.
Returns the input if there are too few
arguments to specify the appropriate result.
Omit both falseResult and unknownResult
to make an expression defined only in the
region where Condition is true.
Use an undef falseResult to define an
expression that graphs only on an interval.
when() is helpful for defining recursive
functions.

200 Alphabetical Listing

While Catalog >
While Condition
     Block
EndWhile
Executes the statements in Block as long
as Condition is true.
Block can be either a single statement or a
sequence of statements separated with the
“:” character.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

xor Catalog >

BooleanExpr1 xor BooleanExpr2 returns
Boolean expressionBooleanList1
xor BooleanList2 returns Boolean
listBooleanMatrix1
xor BooleanMatrix2 returns Boolean
matrix
Returns true if BooleanExpr1 is true and
BooleanExpr2 is false, or vice versa.
Returns false if both arguments are true or
if both are false. Returns a simplified
Boolean expression if either of the
arguments cannot be resolved to true or
false.
Note: See or, page 129.
Integer1 xor Integer2⇒ integer In Hex base mode:

Compares two real integers bit-by-bit using Important: Zero, not the letter O.
an xor operation. Internally, both integers
are converted to signed, 64-bit binary
numbers. When corresponding bits are
compared, the result is 1 if either bit (but
not both) is 1; the result is 0 if both bits are In Bin base mode:
0 or both bits are 1. The returned value
represents the bit results, and is displayed
according to the Base mode.

Alphabetical Listing 201

 xor Catalog >
You can enter the integers in any number Note: A binary entry can have up to 64 digits
base. For a binary or hexadecimal entry, you (not counting the 0b prefix). A hexadecimal
must use the 0b or 0h prefix, respectively. entry can have up to 16 digits.
Without a prefix, integers are treated as
decimal (base 10).
If you enter a decimal integer that is too
large for a signed, 64-bit binary form, a
symmetric modulo operation is used to
bring the value into the appropriate range.
For more information, see ►Base2, page
17.
Note: See or, page 129.

zeros() Catalog >

zeros(Expr, Var) ⇒ list
zeros(Expr, Var=Guess) ⇒ list
Returns a list of candidate real values of
Var that make Expr=0. zeros() does this by
computing exp►list(solve
( Expr=0,Var) ,Var) .
For some purposes, the result form for
zeros() is more convenient than that of
solve() . However, the result form of zeros()
cannot express implicit solutions, solutions
that require inequalities, or solutions that
do not involve Var.
Note: See also cSolve() , cZeros() , and solve
() .
zeros({Expr1, Expr2},
{VarOrGuess1, VarOrGuess2 [, … ]}) ⇒
matrix
Returns candidate real zeros of the
simultaneous algebraic expressions, where
each VarOrGuess specifies an unknown
whose value you seek.
Optionally, you can specify an initial guess
for a variable. Each VarOrGuess must have
the form:

202 Alphabetical Listing

zeros() Catalog >
variable
– or –
variable = real or non-real number
For example, x is valid and so is x=3.
If all of the expressions are polynomials and
if you do NOT specify any initial guesses,
zeros() uses the lexical Gröbner/Buchberger
elimination method to attempt to
determine all real zeros.
For example, suppose you have a circle of
radius r at the origin and another circle of
radius r centered where the first circle
crosses the positive x-axis. Use zeros() to
find the intersections.
As illustrated by r in the example to the
right, simultaneous polynomial expressions
can have extra variables that have no
values, but represent given numeric values
that could be substituted later.
Each row of the resulting matrix represents
an alternate zero, with the components
ordered the same as the varOrGuess list. Extract row 2:
To extract a row, index the matrix by [row].

You can also (or instead) include unknowns

that do not appear in the expressions. For
example, you can include z as an unknown
to extend the previous example to two
parallel intersecting cylinders of radius r.
The cylinder zeros illustrate how families of
zeros might contain arbitrary constants in
the form ck, where k is an integer suffix
from 1 through 255.
For polynomial systems, computation time
or memory exhaustion may depend strongly
on the order in which you list unknowns. If
your initial choice exhausts memory or your
patience, try rearranging the variables in
the expressions and/or varOrGuess list.

Alphabetical Listing 203

 zeros() Catalog >
If you do not include any guesses and if any
expression is non-polynomial in any variable
but all expressions are linear in the
unknowns, zeros() uses Gaussian
elimination to attempt to determine all real
zeros.
If a system is neither polynomial in all of its
variables nor linear in its unknowns, zeros()
determines at most one zero using an
approximate iterative method. To do so, the
number of unknowns must equal the
number of expressions, and all other
variables in the expressions must simplify
to numbers.
Each unknown starts at its guessed value if
there is one; otherwise, it starts at 0.0.
Use guesses to seek additional zeros one by
one. For convergence, a guess may have to
be rather close to a zero.

zInterval Catalog >

zInterval σ,List [,Freq[,CLevel ]]
(Data list input)
zInterval σ,v,n [,CLevel ]
(Summary stats input)
Computes a z confidence interval. A
summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, stat.CUpper Confidence interval for an unknown population mean

stat. x Sample mean of the data sequence from the normal random distribution

stat.ME Margin of error

stat.sx Sample standard deviation

204 Alphabetical Listing

Output variable Description
stat.n Length of the data sequence with sample mean

stat. σ Known population standard deviation for data sequence List

zInterval_1Prop Catalog >

zInterval_1Prop x ,n [,CLevel ]
Computes a one-proportion z confidence
interval. A summary of results is stored in
the stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
x is a non-negative integer.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, stat.CUpper Confidence interval containing confidence level probability of distribution

stat. Ç The calculated proportion of successes

stat.ME Margin of error

stat.n Number of samples in data sequence

zInterval_2Prop Catalog >

zInterval_2Prop x1,n1,x2,n2[,CLevel ]
Computes a two-proportion z confidence
interval. A summary of results is stored in
the stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
x1 and x2 are non-negative integers.
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, stat.CUpper Confidence interval containing confidence level probability of distribution

stat. Ç Diff The calculated difference between proportions

stat.ME Margin of error

Alphabetical Listing 205

Output variable Description
stat. Ç 1 First sample proportion estimate

stat. Ç 2 Second sample proportion estimate

stat.n1 Sample size in data sequence one

stat.n2 Sample size in data sequence two

zInterval_2Samp Catalog >

zInterval_2Samp σ1 ,σ2 ,List1,List2[,Freq1
[,Freq2,[CLevel ]]]
(Data list input)
zInterval_2Samp σ1 ,σ2 ,v 1,n1,v 2,n2
[,CLevel ]
(Summary stats input)
Computes a two-sample z confidence
interval. A summary of results is stored in
the stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.CLower, Confidence interval containing confidence level probability of distribution
stat.CUpper

stat. x1-x2 Sample means of the data sequences from the normal random
distribution

stat.ME Margin of error

stat. x1, stat. x2 Sample means of the data sequences from the normal random
distribution

stat. σx1, stat. σx2 Sample standard deviations for List 1 and List 2

stat.n1, stat.n2 Number of samples in data sequences

stat.r1, stat.r2 Known population standard deviations for data sequence List 1 and List
2

zTest Catalog >

zTest μ0,σ,List ,[Freq[,Hypoth]]

206 Alphabetical Listing

zTest Catalog >
(Data list input)
zTest μ0,σ,v,n[,Hypoth]
(Summary stats input)
Performs a z test with frequency freqlist . A
summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
Test H : μ = μ0, against one of the
0
following:
For H : μ < μ0, set Hypoth<0
a
For H : μ ≠ μ0 (default), set Hypoth=0
a
For H : μ > μ0, set Hypoth>0
a
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.z (x − μ0) / (σ / sqrt(n))

stat.P Value Least probability at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat. x Sample mean of the data sequence in List

stat.sx Sample standard deviation of the data sequence. Only returned for Data input.

stat.n Size of the sample

zTest_1Prop Catalog >

Output variable Description

stat.p0 Hypothesized population proportion

stat.z Standard normal value computed for the proportion

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat. Ç Estimated sample proportion

stat.n Size of the sample

zTest_2Prop Catalog >

zTest_2Prop x1,n1,x2,n2[,Hypoth]

Alphabetical Listing 207

 zTest_2Prop Catalog >
Computes a two-proportion z test. A
summary of results is stored in the
stat.results variable. (See page 176.)
x1 and x2 are non-negative integers.
Test H : p1 = p2, against one of the
0
following:
For H : p1 > p2, set Hypoth>0
a
For H : p1 ≠ p2 (default), set Hypoth=0
a
For H : p < p0, set Hypoth<0
a
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.z Standard normal value computed for the difference of proportions

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat. Ç 1 First sample proportion estimate

stat. Ç 2 Second sample proportion estimate

stat. Ç Pooled sample proportion estimate

stat.n1, stat.n2 Number of samples taken in trials 1 and 2

zTest_2Samp Catalog >

zTest_2Samp σ1 ,σ2 ,List1,List2[,Freq1
[,Freq2[,Hypoth]]]
(Data list input)
zTest_2Samp σ1 ,σ2 ,v 1,n1,v 2,n2[,Hypoth]
(Summary stats input)
Computes a two-sample z test. A summary
of results is stored in the stat.results
variable. (See page 176.)
Test H : μ1 = μ2, against one of the
0
following:
For H : μ1 < μ2, set Hypoth<0
a
For H : μ1 ≠ μ2 (default), set Hypoth=0
a
For H : μ1 > μ2, Hypoth>0
a

208 Alphabetical Listing

zTest_2Samp Catalog >
For information on the effect of empty
elements in a list, see “Empty (Void)
Elements,” page 251.

Output variable Description

stat.z Standard normal value computed for the difference of means

stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected

stat. x1, stat. x2 Sample means of the data sequences in List1 and List2

stat.sx1, stat.sx2 Sample standard deviations of the data sequences in List1 and List2

stat.n1, stat.n2 Size of the samples

Alphabetical Listing 209

Symbols

+ (add) + key
Expr1 + Expr2 ⇒ expression
Returns the sum of the two arguments.

List1 + List2 ⇒ list

Matrix1 + Matrix2 ⇒ matrix
Returns a list (or matrix) containing the
sums of corresponding elements in List1
and List2 (or Matrix1 and Matrix2).
Dimensions of the arguments must be
equal.

Expr + List1 ⇒ list

List1 + Expr ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the sums of Expr
and each element in List1.
Expr + Matrix1 ⇒ matrix
Matrix1 + Expr ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix with Expr added to each
element on the diagonal of Matrix1.
Matrix1 must be square.
Note: Use .+ (dot plus) to add an expression
to each element.

− (subtract) - key
Expr1 − Expr2 ⇒ expression
Returns Expr1 minus Expr2.

List1 −List2⇒ list

Matrix1 −Matrix2 ⇒ matrix

210 Symbols
− (subtract) - key
Subtracts each element in List2 (or
Matrix2) from the corresponding element
in List1 (or Matrix1), and returns the
results.
Dimensions of the arguments must be
equal.
Expr − List1 ⇒ list
List1 − Expr ⇒ list
Subtracts each List1 element from Expr or
subtracts Expr from each List1 element,
and returns a list of the results.
Expr − Matrix1 ⇒ matrix
Matrix1 − Expr ⇒ matrix
Expr − Matrix1 returns a matrix of Expr
times the identity matrix minus
Matrix1.  Matrix1 must be square.
Matrix1 − Expr returns a matrix of Expr
times the identity matrix subtracted from
Matrix1.  Matrix1 must be square.
Note: Use .− (dot minus) to subtract an
expression from each element.

• (multiply) r key
Expr1•Expr2 ⇒ expression
Returns the product of the two arguments.
List1•List2 ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the products of the
corresponding elements in List1 and List2.
Dimensions of the lists must be equal.
Matrix1•Matrix2 ⇒ matrix
Returns the matrix product of Matrix1 and
Matrix2.
The number of columns in Matrix1 must
equal the number of rows in Matrix2.

Symbols 211
 • (multiply) r key
Expr •List1 ⇒ list
List1•Expr ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the products of
Expr and each element in List1.

Expr •Matrix1 ⇒ matrix

Matrix1•Expr ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix containing the products of
Expr and each element in Matrix1.

Note: Use .•(dot multiply) to multiply an

expression by each element.

⁄ (divide) p key
Expr1 ⁄ Expr2 ⇒ expression
Returns the quotient of Expr1 divided by
Expr2.
Note: See also Fraction template, page 1.
List1 ⁄ List2 ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the quotients of
List1 divided by List2.
Dimensions of the lists must be equal.
Expr ⁄ List1 ⇒ list
List1 ⁄ Expr ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the quotients of
Expr divided by List1 orList1 divided by
Expr.
Matrix1 ⁄ Expr ⇒ matrix
Returns a matrix containing the quotients
of Matrix1 ⁄ Expr.

Matrix1 ⁄ Value ⇒ matrix

212 Symbols
⁄ (divide) p key
Note: Use . ⁄ (dot divide) to divide an
expression by each element.

^ (power) l key
Expr1 ^ Expr2⇒ expression
List1 ^ List2 ⇒ list

Returns the first argument raised to the

power of the second argument.
Note: See also Exponent template, page 1.
For a list, returns the elements in List1
raised to the power of the corresponding
elements in List2.
In the real domain, fractional powers that
have reduced exponents with odd
denominators use the real branch versus
the principal branch for complex mode.
Expr ^ List1 ⇒ list
Returns Expr raised to the power of the
elements in List1.
List1 ^ Expr ⇒ list
Returns the elements in List1 raised to the
power of Expr.
squareMatrix1 ^ integer ⇒ matrix
Returns squareMatrix1 raised to the
integer power.
squareMatrix1 must be a square matrix.
If integer = −1, computes the inverse
matrix.
If integer < −1, computes the inverse
matrix to an appropriate positive power.

Symbols 213
 x2 (square) q key
Expr12⇒ expression
Returns the square of the argument.
List12 ⇒ list
Returns a list containing the squares of the
elements in List1.
squareMatrix12 ⇒ matrix
Returns the matrix square of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating the square of each element. Use
.^2 to calculate the square of each element.

.+ (dot add) ^+ keys

Matrix1 .+ Matrix2 ⇒ matrix
Expr .+ Matrix1⇒ matrix
Matrix1.+Matrix2 returns a matrix that is
the sum of each pair of corresponding
elements in Matrix1 and Matrix2.
Expr .+ Matrix1 returns a matrix that is
the sum of Expr and each element in
Matrix1.

. ⁻(dot subt.) ^- keys

Matrix1 .− Matrix2⇒ matrix
Expr .− Matrix1 ⇒ matrix
Matrix1.− Matrix2 returns a matrix that is
the difference between each pair of
corresponding elements in Matrix1 and
Matrix2.
Expr .− Matrix1 returns a matrix that is
the difference of Expr and each element in
Matrix1.
.

214 Symbols
. •(dot mult.) ^r keys
Matrix1 .• Matrix2⇒ matrix
Expr .• Matrix1 ⇒ matrix
Matrix1.• Matrix2 returns a matrix that is
the product of each pair of corresponding
elements in Matrix1 and Matrix2.
Expr .• Matrix1 returns a matrix
containing the products of Expr and each
element in Matrix1.

. ⁄ (dot divide) ^p keys

Matrix1. ⁄ Matrix2 ⇒ matrix
Expr . ⁄ Matrix1⇒ matrix
Matrix1 . ⁄ Matrix2 returns a matrix that is
the quotient of each pair of corresponding
elements in Matrix1 and Matrix2.
Expr . ⁄ Matrix1 returns a matrix that is
the quotient of Expr and each element in
Matrix1.

.^ (dot power) ^l keys

Matrix1 .^ Matrix2 ⇒ matrix
Expr . ^ Matrix1⇒ matrix
Matrix1.^ Matrix2 returns a matrix where
each element in Matrix2 is the exponent
for the corresponding element in Matrix1.
Expr .^ Matrix1 returns a matrix where
each element in Matrix1 is the exponent
for Expr.

− (negate) v key
−Expr1 ⇒ expression
−List1 ⇒ list
−Matrix1 ⇒ matrix

Symbols 215
 − (negate) v key
Returns the negation of the argument.
In Bin base mode:
For a list or matrix, returns all the elements
Important: Zero, not the letter O.
negated.
If the argument is a binary or hexadecimal
integer, the negation gives the two’s
complement.
To see the entire result,
press 5 and then use 7 and 8 to move the
cursor.

% (percent) /k keys
Expr1% ⇒ expression Note: To force an approximate result,

List1% ⇒ list Handheld: Press / ·.

Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter .
Matrix1% ⇒ matrix Macintosh®: Press “+Enter .
iPad®: Hold enter , and select .

Returns
For a list or matrix, returns a list or matrix
with each element divided by 100.

= (equal) = key
Expr1=Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression Example function that uses math test
symbols: =, ≠, <, ≤, >, ≥
List1=List2 ⇒ Boolean list
Matrix1=Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be
equal to Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to not
be equal to Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of
the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons
element by element.

216 Symbols
= (equal) = key
Note for entering the example: For Result of graphing g(x)
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

≠ (not equal) /= keys

Expr1≠Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example.

List1≠List2 ⇒ Boolean list

Matrix1≠Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be
not equal to Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be
equal to Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of
the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons
element by element.
Note: You can insert this operator from the
keyboard by typing /=

< (less than) /= keys

Expr1<Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example.

List1<List2 ⇒ Boolean list

Matrix1<Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be
less than Expr2.

Symbols 217
 < (less than) /= keys
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be
greater than or equal to Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of
the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons
element by element.

≤ (less or equal) /= keys

Expr1≤Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example.

List1≤List2 ⇒ Boolean list

Matrix1 ≤Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be
less than or equal to Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be
greater than Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of
the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons
element by element.
Note: You can insert this operator from the
keyboard by typing <=

> (greater than) /= keys

Expr1>Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example.

List1>List2 ⇒ Boolean list

Matrix1>Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be
greater than Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be
less than or equal to Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of
the equation.

218 Symbols
> (greater than) /= keys
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons
element by element.

≥ (greater or equal) /= keys

Expr1≥Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example.

List1≥List2 ⇒ Boolean list

Matrix1 ≥Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix
Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be
greater than or equal to Expr2.
Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be
less than Expr2.
Anything else returns a simplified form of
the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons
element by element.
Note: You can insert this operator from the
keyboard by typing >=

⇒ (logical implication) /= keys

BooleanExpr1 ⇒ BooleanExpr2 returns
Boolean expression
BooleanList1 ⇒ BooleanList2 returns
Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1 ⇒ BooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix
Integer1 ⇒ Integer2 returns Integer
Evaluates the expression not <argument1>
or <argument2> and returns true, false, or a
simplified form of the equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons
element by element.
Note: You can insert this operator from the
keyboard by typing =>

Symbols 219
 ⇔ (logical double implication, XNOR) /= keys
BooleanExpr1 ⇔ BooleanExpr2 returns
Boolean expression
BooleanList1 ⇔ BooleanList2 returns
Boolean list
BooleanMatrix1 ⇔ BooleanMatrix2
returns Boolean matrix
Integer1 ⇔ Integer2 returns Integer
Returns the negation of an XOR Boolean
operation on the two arguments. Returns
true, false, or a simplified form of the
equation.
For lists and matrices, returns comparisons
element by element.
Note: You can insert this operator from the
keyboard by typing <=>

! (factorial) º key
Expr1! ⇒ expression
List1! ⇒ list
Matrix1! ⇒ matrix
Returns the factorial of the argument.
For a list or matrix, returns a list or matrix
of factorials of the elements.

& (append) /k keys

String1 & String2 ⇒ string
Returns a text string that is String2
appended to String1.

220 Symbols
d() (derivative) Catalog >
d(Expr1, Var[, Order]) ⇒ expression
d(List1, Var[, Order]) ⇒ list
d(Matrix1,Var[, Order]) ⇒ matrix
Returns the first derivative of the first
argument with respect to variable Var.
Order, if included, must be an integer. If
the order is less than zero, the result will be
an anti-derivative.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing derivative(...).
d() does not follow the normal evaluation
mechanism of fully simplifying its
arguments and then applying the function
definition to these fully simplified
arguments. Instead, d() performs the
following steps:
1. Simplify the second argument only to
the extent that it does not lead to a
non-variable.
2. Simplify the first argument only to the
extent that it does recall any stored
value for the variable determined by
step 1.
3. Determine the symbolic derivative of
the result of step 2 with respect to the
variable from step 1.
If the variable from step 1 has a stored
value or a value specified by the constraint
(“|”) operator, substitute that value into
the result from step 3.
Note: See also First derivative,  page 5;
Second derivative,  page 6; or
Nth derivative,  page 6.

∫() (integral) Catalog >

∫(Expr1, Var[,Lower,Upper]) ⇒
expression
∫(Expr1,Var[,Constant ]) ⇒ expression

Symbols 221
 ∫() (integral) Catalog >
Returns the integral of Expr1 with respect
to the variable Var from Lower to Upper.
Note: See also Definite or Indefinite integral
template, page 6.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing integral(...).
If Lower and Upper are omitted, returns an
anti-derivative. A symbolic constant of
integration is omitted unless you provide
the Constant argument.

Equally valid anti-derivatives might differ by

a numeric constant. Such a constant might
be disguised—particularly when an anti-
derivative contains logarithms or inverse
trigonometric functions. Moreover,
piecewise constant expressions are
sometimes added to make an anti-
derivative valid over a larger interval than
the usual formula.
∫() returns itself for pieces of Expr1 that it
cannot determine as an explicit finite
combination of its built-in functions and
operators.
When you provide Lower and Upper, an
attempt is made to locate any
discontinuities or discontinuous derivatives
in the interval Lower < Var < Upper and to
subdivide the interval at those places.
For the Auto setting of the Auto or
Approximate mode, numerical integration is
used where applicable when an anti-
derivative or a limit cannot be determined.
For the Approximate setting, numerical
integration is tried first, if applicable. Anti-
derivatives are sought only where such Note: To force an approximate result,
numerical integration is inapplicable or Handheld: Press / ·.
fails.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter .
Macintosh®: Press “+Enter .
iPad®: Hold enter , and select .

222 Symbols
∫() (integral) Catalog >

∫() can be nested to do multiple integrals.

Integration limits can depend on integration
variables outside them.
Note: See also nInt() , page 122.

√() (square root) /q keys

√(Expr1) ⇒ expression
√(List1) ⇒ list

Returns the square root of the argument.

For a list, returns the square roots of all the
elements in List1.
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing sqrt(...)
Note: See also Square root template, page
1.

Π() (prodSeq) Catalog >

Π(Expr1, Var, Low, High) ⇒ expression
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing prodSeq(...).
Evaluates Expr1 for each value of Var from
Low to High, and returns the product of the
results.
Note: See also Product template ( Π) , page
5.

Symbols 223
 Π() (prodSeq) Catalog >
Π(Expr1, Var, Low, Low−1) ⇒ 1
Π(Expr1, Var, Low, High) ⇒ 1/Π(Expr1,
Var, High+1, Low−1) if High < Low−1

The product formulas used are derived from

the following reference:
Ronald L. Graham, Donald E. Knuth, and
Oren Patashnik. Concrete Mathematics: A
Foundation for Computer Science .
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley,
1994.

Σ() (sumSeq) Catalog >

Σ(Expr1, Var, Low, High) ⇒ expression
Note: You can insert this function from the
keyboard by typing sumSeq(...).
Evaluates Expr1 for each value of Var from
Low to High, and returns the sum of the
results.
Note: See also Sum template, page 5.

Σ(Expr1, Var, Low, Low−1) ⇒ 0

Σ(Expr1, Var, Low, High) ⇒ μ
Σ(Expr1, Var, High+1, Low−1) if High <
Low−1

The summation formulas used are derived

from the following reference:
Ronald L. Graham, Donald E. Knuth, and
Oren Patashnik. Concrete Mathematics: A
Foundation for Computer Science .
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley,
1994.

224 Symbols
ΣInt() Catalog >
ΣInt(NPmt1, NPmt2, N, I, PV ,[Pmt ], [FV],
[PpY], [CpY], [PmtAt ], [roundValue ])
⇒  value
ΣInt(NPmt1,NPmt2,amortTable ) ⇒ value
Amortization function that calculates the
sum of the interest during a specified range
of payments.
NPmt1 and NPmt2 define the start and end
boundaries of the payment range.
N, I, PV, Pmt , FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 195.
• If you omit Pmt , it defaults to
Pmt =tvmPmt
( N,I,PV,FV,PpY,CpY,PmtAt ).
• If you omit FV, it defaults to FV=0.
• The defaults for PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are the same as for the TVM functions.
roundValue specifies the number of
decimal places for rounding. Default=2.
ΣInt( NPmt1,NPmt2,amortTable ) calculates
the sum of the interest based on
amortization table amortTable . The
amortTable argument must be a matrix in
the form described under amortTbl() , page
8.
Note: See also ΣPrn(), below, and Bal() ,
page 17.

ΣPrn() Catalog >

ΣPrn(NPmt1, NPmt2, N, I, PV, [Pmt ],
[FV], [PpY], [CpY], [PmtAt ],
[roundValue ]) ⇒ value
ΣPrn(NPmt1, NPmt2, amortTable ) ⇒
value
Amortization function that calculates the
sum of the principal during a specified
range of payments.

Symbols 225
 ΣPrn() Catalog >
NPmt1 and NPmt2 define the start and end
boundaries of the payment range.
N, I, PV, Pmt , FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are described in the table of TVM
arguments, page 195.
• If you omit Pmt , it defaults to
Pmt =tvmPmt
( N,I,PV,FV,PpY,CpY,PmtAt ).
• If you omit FV, it defaults to FV=0.
• The defaults for PpY, CpY, and PmtAt
are the same as for the TVM functions.
roundValue specifies the number of
decimal places for rounding. Default=2.
ΣPrn( NPmt1,NPmt2,amortTable )
calculates the sum of the principal paid
based on amortization table amortTable .
The amortTable argument must be a
matrix in the form described under
amortTbl() , page 8.
Note: See also ΣInt(), above, and Bal() ,
page 17.

# (indirection) /k keys
# varNameString
Refers to the variable whose name is
Creates or refers to the variable xyz .
varNameString. This lets you use strings to
create variable names from within a
function.

Returns the value of the variable (r) whose

name is stored in variable s1.

226 Symbols
E (scientific notation) i key
mantissaEexponent
Enters a number in scientific notation. The
number is interpreted as
mantissa × 10exponent.
Hint: If you want to enter a power of 10
without causing a decimal value result, use
10^integer.
Note: You can insert this operator from the
computer keyboard by typing @E. for
example, type 2.3@E4 to enter 2.3E 4.

g (gradian) ¹ key
Expr1g ⇒ expression In Degree, Gradian or Radian mode:

List1g ⇒ list
Matrix1g ⇒ matrix

This function gives you a way to specify a

gradian angle while in the Degree or Radian
mode.
In Radian angle mode, multiplies Expr1 by
π/200.
In Degree angle mode, multiplies Expr1 by
g/100.
In Gradian mode, returns Expr1 unchanged.
Note: You can insert this symbol from the
computer keyboard by typing @g.

r(radian) ¹ key
Expr1r ⇒ expression In Degree, Gradian or Radian angle mode:

List1r ⇒ list
Matrix1r ⇒ matrix

Symbols 227
 r(radian) ¹ key
This function gives you a way to specify a
radian angle while in Degree or Gradian
mode.
In Degree angle mode, multiplies the
argument by 180/ π.
In Radian angle mode, returns the
argument unchanged.
In Gradian mode, multiplies the argument
by 200/ π.
Hint: Use r if you want to force radians in a
function definition regardless of the mode
that prevails when the function is used.
Note: You can insert this symbol from the
computer keyboard by typing @r.

° (degree) ¹ key
Expr1° ⇒ expression In Degree, Gradian or Radian angle mode:

List1° ⇒ list
Matrix1° ⇒ matrix
This function gives you a way to specify a In Radian angle mode:
degree angle while in Gradian or Radian Note: To force an approximate result,
mode.
Handheld: Press / ·.
In Radian angle mode, multiplies the
Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter .
argument by π/180.
Macintosh®: Press “+Enter .
In Degree angle mode, returns the iPad®: Hold enter , and select .
argument unchanged.
In Gradian angle mode, multiplies the
argument by 10/9.
Note: You can insert this symbol from the
computer keyboard by typing @d.

°, ', '' (degree/minute/second) /k keys

dd°mm'ss.ss'' ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode:

228 Symbols
°, ', '' (degree/minute/second) /k keys
dd A positive or negative number
mm A non-negative number
ss.ss A non-negative number
Returns dd+( mm/60)+( ss.ss/3600).
This base-60 entry format lets you:
• Enter an angle in
degrees/minutes/seconds without regard
to the current angle mode.
• Enter time as hours/minutes/seconds.
Note: Follow ss.ss with two apostrophes
(''), not a quote symbol (").

∠ (angle) /k keys
[Radius,∠ θ_Angle ] ⇒ vector In Radian mode and vector format set to:
(polar input) rectangular

[Radius,∠ θ_Angle ,Z_Coordinate ] ⇒

vector
(cylindrical input)
[Radius,∠ θ_Angle ,∠ θ_Angle ] ⇒ vector
(spherical input) cylindrical

Returns coordinates as a vector depending

on the Vector Format mode setting:
rectangular, cylindrical, or spherical.
Note: You can insert this symbol from the
spherical
computer keyboard by typing @<.

( Magnitude∠ Angle ) ⇒ complexValue In Radian angle mode and Rectangular

(polar input) complex format:

Enters a complex value in (r∠ θ) polar

form. The Angle is interpreted according to
the current Angle mode setting.
Note: To force an approximate result,

Handheld: Press / ·.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter .
Macintosh®: Press “+Enter .
iPad®: Hold enter , and select .

Symbols 229
 ∠ (angle) /k keys

' (prime) º key

variable '
variable ' '
Enters a prime symbol in a differential
equation. A single prime symbol denotes a
1st-order differential equation, two prime
symbols denote a 2nd-order, and so on.

See “Empty (Void) Elements,”

_ (underscore as an empty element) page 251.

_ (underscore as unit designator) /_ keys

Expr_Unit
Designates the units for an Expr. All unit
Note: You can find the conversion symbol,
names must begin with an underscore.
►, in the Catalog. Click , and then click
You can use pre-defined units or create your Math Operators.
own units. For a list of pre-defined units,
open the Catalog and display the Unit
Conversions tab. You can select unit names
from the Catalog or type the unit names
directly.
Variable _ Assuming z is undefined:

When Variable has no value, it is treated

as though it represents a complex number.
By default, without the _ , the variable is
treated as real.
If Variable has a value, the _ is ignored and
Variable retains its original data type.
Note: You can store a complex number to a
variable without
using _ . However, for best results in
calculations such as cSolve() and cZeros() ,
the _ is recommended.

230 Symbols
► (convert) /k keys
Expr_Unit1►_Unit2 ⇒ Expr_Unit2
Converts an expression from one unit to
another.
The _ underscore character designates the
units. The units must be in the same
category, such as Length or Area.
For a list of pre-defined units, open the
Catalog and display the Unit Conversions
tab:
• You can select a unit name from the list.
• You can select the conversion operator,
►, from the top of the list.
You can also type unit names manually. To
type “_” when typing unit names on the
handheld, press /_.
Note: To convert temperature units, use
tmpCnv() and ΔtmpCnv() . The ► conversion
operator does not handle temperature
units.

10^() Catalog >

10^ (Expr1) ⇒ expression
10^ (List1) ⇒ list
Returns 10 raised to the power of the
argument.
For a list, returns 10 raised to the power of
the elements in List1.
10^(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix
Returns 10 raised to the power of
squareMatrix1. This is not the same as
calculating 10 raised to the power of each
element. For information about the
calculation method, refer to cos() .
squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
result always contains floating-point
numbers.

Symbols 231
 ^ ⁻¹ (reciprocal) Catalog >
Expr1 ^⁻¹ ⇒ expression
List1 ^⁻¹ ⇒ list
Returns the reciprocal of the argument.
For a list, returns the reciprocals of the
elements in List1.
squareMatrix1 ^⁻¹ ⇒ squareMatrix
Returns the inverse of squareMatrix1.
squareMatrix1 must be a non-singular
square matrix.

| (constraint operator) /k keys

Expr | BooleanExpr1[and
BooleanExpr2]...
Expr | BooleanExpr1[ orBooleanExpr2]...
The constraint (“|”) symbol serves as a
binary operator. The operand to the left of |
is an expression. The operand to the right of
| specifies one or more relations that are
intended to affect the simplification of the
expression. Multiple relations after | must
be joined by logical “and” or “or” operators.
The constraint operator provides three basic
types of functionality:
• Substitutions
• Interval constraints
• Exclusions
Substitutions are in the form of an equality,
such as x=3 or y=sin(x). To be most
effective, the left side should be a simple
variable. Expr | Variable = value will
substitute value for every occurrence of
Variable in Expr.

232 Symbols
| (constraint operator) /k keys
Interval constraints take the form of one or
more inequalities joined by logical “and” or
“or” operators. Interval constraints also
permit simplification that otherwise might
be invalid or not computable.

Exclusions use the “not equals” (/= or ≠)

relational operator to exclude a specific
value from consideration. They are used
primarily to exclude an exact solution when
using cSolve() , cZeros() , fMax() , fMin() ,
solve() , zeros() , and so on.

→ (store) /h key
Expr → Var
List → Var
Matrix → Var
Expr → Function(Param1,...)
List → Function(Param1,...)
Matrix → Function(Param1,...)
If the variable Var does not exist, creates it
and initializes it to Expr, List , or Matrix .
If the variable Var already exists and is not
locked or protected, replaces its contents
with Expr, List , or Matrix .

Symbols 233
 → (store) /h key
Hint: If you plan to do symbolic
computations using undefined variables,
avoid storing anything into commonly used,
one-letter variables such as a, b, c, x, y, z,
and so on.
Note: You can insert this operator from the
keyboard by typing =: as a shortcut. For
example, type pi/4 =: myvar.

:= (assign) /t keys
Var := Expr
Var := List
Var := Matrix
Function(Param1,...) := Expr
Function(Param1,...) := List
Function(Param1,...) := Matrix
If variable Var does not exist, creates Var
and initializes it to Expr, List , or Matrix .
If Var already exists and is not locked or
protected, replaces its contents with Expr,
List , or Matrix .
Hint: If you plan to do symbolic
computations using undefined variables,
avoid storing anything into commonly used,
one-letter variables such as a, b, c, x, y, z,
and so on.

234 Symbols
© (comment) /k keys
© [text ]
© processes text as a comment line,
allowing you to annotate functions and
programs that you create.
© can be at the beginning or anywhere in
the line. Everything to the right of © , to the
end of the line, is the comment.
Note for entering the example: For
instructions on entering multi-line program
and function definitions, refer to the
Calculator section of your product
guidebook.

0b, 0h 0B keys, 0H keys

0b binaryNumber In Dec base mode:
0h hexadecimalNumber
Denotes a binary or hexadecimal number,
respectively. To enter a binary or hex
number, you must enter the 0b or 0h prefix In Bin base mode:
regardless of the Base mode. Without a
prefix, a number is treated as decimal
(base 10).
Results are displayed according to the Base In Hex base mode:
mode.

Symbols 235
TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands
This is a supplemental document for the TI-Nspire™ Reference Guide and the TI-
Nspire™ CAS Reference Guide. All TI-Nspire™ CX II commands will be incorporated and
published in version 5.1 of the TI-Nspire™ Reference Guide and the TI-Nspire™ CAS
Reference Guide.

Graphics Programming
New commands have been added on TI-Nspire™ CX II Handhelds and TI-Nspire™
desktop applications for graphics programming.
The TI-Nspire™ CX II Handhelds will switch into this graphics mode while executing
graphics commands and switch back to the context in which the program was executed
after completion of the program.
The screen will display “Running…” in the top bar while the program is being executed.
It will show “Finished” when the program completes. Any key-press will transition the
system out of the graphics mode.
• The transition to graphics mode is triggered automatically when one of the Draw
(graphics) commands is encountered during execution of the TI Basic program.
• This transition will only happen when executing a program from calculator; in a
document or calculator in scratchpad.
• The transition out of graphics mode happens upon termination of the program.
• The graphics mode is only available on the TI-Nspire™ CX II Handhelds and the
desktop TI-Nspire™ CX II Handhelds view. This means it is not available in the
computer document view or PublishView (.tnsp) on the desktop nor on iOS.
- If a graphics command is encountered while executing a TI Basic program from
the incorrect context, an error message is displayed and the TI Basic program is
terminated.
Graphics Screen
The graphics screen will contain a header at the top of the screen that cannot be
written to by graphics commands.
The graphics screen drawing area will be cleared (color = 255,255,255) when the
graphics screen is initialized.

Graphics Default
Screen
Height 212
Width 318
Color white: 255,255,255

236 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

Default View and Settings
• The status icons in the top bar (battery status, press-to-test status, network
indicator etc.) will not be visible while a graphics program is running.
• Default drawing color: Black (0,0,0)
• Default pen style - normal, smooth
- Thickness: 1 (thin), 2 (normal), 3 (thickest)
- Style: 1 (smooth), 2 (dotted), 3 (dashed)
• All drawing commands will use the current color and pen settings; either default
values or those which were set via TI-Basic commands.
• Text font is fixed and cannot be changed.
• Any output to the graphics screen will be drawn within a clipping window which is
the size of the graphics screen drawing area. Any drawn output that extends
outside of this clipped graphics screen drawing area will not be drawn. No error
message will be displayed.
• All x,y coordinates specified for drawing commands are defined such that 0,0 is at
the top left corner of the graphics screen drawing area.
- Exceptions:
- DrawText uses the coordinates as the bottom left corner of the bounding
box for the text.
- SetWindow uses the bottom left corner of the screen
• All parameters for the commands can be provided as expressions that evaluate to
a number which is then rounded to the nearest integer.

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 237

Graphics Screen Errors Messages
If the validation fails, an error message will display.

Error Message Description View

Error If the syntax checker finds any syntax
Syntax errors, it displays an error message
and tries to position the cursor near
the first error so you can correct it.

Error The function or command is missing

Too few arguments one or more arguments

Error The function or command contains

Too many and excessive number of arguments
arguments and cannot be evaluated.

Error An argument is of the wrong data

Invalid data type type.

Invalid Commands While in Graphics Mode

Some commands are not allowed once the program switches to graphics mode. If
these commands are encountered while in graphics mode and error will be displayed
and the program will be terminated.

Disallowed Error Message

Command
Request Request cannot be executed in graphics mode
RequestStr RequestStr cannot be executed in graphics mode
Text Text cannot be executed in graphics mode

The commands that print text to the calculator - disp and dispAt - will be supported
commands in the graphics context. The text from these commands will be sent to the
Calculator screen (not on Graphics) and will be visible after the program exits and the
system switches back to the Calculator app

238 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

C

Clear Catalog >

CXII
Clear x, y, width, height Clear
Clears entire screen
Clears entire screen if no parameters are
specified.
Clear 10,10,100,50
If x , y , width and height are specified, the
rectangle defined by the parameters will be Clears a rectangle area with top
left corner on (10, 10) and with
cleared. width 100, height 50

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 239

D

DrawArc Catalog >

CXII
DrawArc x, y, width, height, startAngle, DrawArc 20,20,100,100,0,90
arcAngle
Draw an arc within the defined bounding
rectangle with the provided start and arc
angles.
x , y : upper left coordinate of bounding
rectangle
width, height : dimensions of bounding
rectangle DrawArc 50,50,100,100,0,180

The "arc angle" defines the sweep of the

arc.
These parameters can be provided as
expressions that evaluate to a number which
is then rounded to the nearest integer.

See Also: FillArc

DrawCircle Catalog >

CXII
DrawCircle x, y, radius DrawCircle 150,150,40

x , y : coordinate of center
radius: radius of the circle

See Also: FillCircle

240 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

DrawLine Catalog >
CXII
DrawLine x1, y1, x2, y2 DrawLine 10,10,150,200

Draw a line from x1, y1, x2, y2.

Expressions that evaluate to a number which
is then rounded to the nearest integer.
Screen bounds: If the specified coordinates
causes any part of the line to be drawn
outside of the graphics screen, that part of
the line will be clipped and no error
message will be displayed.

DrawPoly Catalog >

CXII
The commands have two variants: xlist:={0,200,150,0}
ylist:={10,20,150,10}
DrawPoly xlist, ylist
DrawPoly xlist,ylist
or
DrawPoly x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3...xn, yn
Note: DrawPoly xlist, ylist
Shape will connect x1, y1 to x2, y2, x2, y2 to
x3, y3 and so on.
Note: DrawPoly x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3...xn,
yn
xn, yn will NOT be automatically connected DrawPoly 0,10,200,20,150,150,0,10
to x1, y1.
Expressions that evaluate to a list of real
floats
xlist , ylist
Expressions that evaluate to a single real
float
x1, y1...xn, yn = coordinates for vertices of
polygon

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 241

 DrawPoly Catalog >
CXII
Note: DrawPoly: Input size dimensions
(width/height) relative to drawn lines.
The lines are drawn in a bounding box
around the specified coordinate and
dimensions such that the actual size of the
drawn polygon will be larger than the width
and height.
See Also: FillPoly

DrawRect Catalog >

CXII
DrawRect x, y, width, height DrawRect 25,25,100,50

x , y: upper left coordinate of rectangle

width, height : width and height of rectangle
(rectangle drawn down and right from
starting coordinate).
Note: The lines are drawn in a bounding box
around the specified coordinate and
dimensions such that the actual size of the
drawn rectangle will be larger than the
width and height indicate.
See Also: FillRect

DrawText Catalog >

CXII
DrawText x, y, exprOrString1 DrawText 50,50,"Hello World"
[,exprOrString2]...
x , y : coordinate of text output
Draws the text in exprOrString at the
specified x , y coordinate location.
The rules for exprOrString are the same as
for Disp – DrawText can take multiple
arguments.

242 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

F

FillArc Catalog >

CXII
FillArc x, y, width, height startAngle, FillArc 50,50,100,100,0,180
arcAngle
x , y : upper left coordinate of bounding
rectangle
Draw and fill an arc within the defined
bounding rectangle with the provided start
and arc angles.
Default fill color is black. The fill color can be
set by the SetColor command
The "arc angle" defines the sweep of the arc

FillCircle Catalog >

CXII
FillCircle x, y, radius FillCircle 150,150,40

x , y : coordinate of center
Draw and fill a circle at the specified center
with the specified radius.
Default fill color is black. The fill color can be
set by the SetColor command.
Here!

FillPoly Catalog >

CXII
FillPoly xlist, ylist xlist:={0,200,150,0}

or ylist:={10,20,150,10}
FillPoly xlist,ylist
FillPoly x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3...xn, yn
Note: The line and color are specified by
SetColor and SetPen

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 243

 FillPoly Catalog >
CXII

FillPoly 0,10,200,20,150,150,0,10

FillRect Catalog >

CXII
FillRect x, y, width, height FillRect 25,25,100,50

x , y : upper left coordinate of rectangle

width, height : width and height of rectangle
Draw and fill a rectangle with the top left
corner at the coordinate specified by ( x ,y )
Default fill color is black. The fill color can be
set by the SetColor command
Note: The line and color are specified by
SetColor and SetPen

244 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

G

getPlatform() Catalog >

CXII
getPlatform()
Returns:
“dt” on desktop software applications
“hh” on TI-Nspire™ CX handhelds
“ios” on TI-Nspire™ CX iPad® app

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 245

P

PaintBuffer Catalog >

CXII
PaintBuffer UseBuffer
For n,1,10
Paint graphics buffer to screen
x:=randInt(0,300)
This command is used in conjunction with y:=randInt(0,200)
UseBuffer to increase the speed of display
on the screen when the program generates radius:=randInt(10,50)
multiple graphical objects. Wait 0.5
DrawCircle x,y,radius
EndFor
PaintBuffer
This program will display all the
10 circles at once.
If the “UseBuffer” command is
removed, each circle will be
displayed as it is drawn.

See Also: UseBuffer

246 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

PlotXY Catalog >
CXII
PlotXY x, y, shape PlotXY 100,100,1

x , y : coordinate to plot shape

shape : a number between 1 and 13
specifying the shape
1 - Filled circle
2 - Empty circle
3 - Filled square
For n,1,13
4 - Empty square DrawText 1+22*n,40,n

5 - Cross PlotXY 5+22*n,50,n

EndFor
6 - Plus
7 - Thin
8 - medium point, solid
9 - medium point, empty
10 - larger point, solid
11 - larger point, empty
12 - largest point, solid
13 - largest point, empty

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 247

S

SetColor Catalog >

CXII
SetColor SetColor 255,0,0
DrawCircle 150,150,100
Red-value, Green-value, Blue-value
Valid values for red, green and blue are
between 0 and 255
Sets the color for subsequent Draw
commands

SetPen Catalog >

CXII
SetPen SetPen 3,3
DrawCircle 150,150,50
thickness, style
thickness: 1 <= thickness <= 3|1 is thinnest,
3 is thickest
style: 1 = Smooth, 2 = Dotted, 3 = Dashed
Sets the pen style for subsequent Draw
commands

SetWindow Catalog >

CXII
SetWindow SetWindow 0,160,0,120
will set the output window to have
xMin, xMax, yMin, yMax 0,0 in the bottom left corner with
a width of 160 and a height of 120
Establishes a logical window that maps to
DrawLine 0,0,100,100
the graphics drawing area. All parameters
are required. SetWindow 0,160,0,120
SetPen 3,3
If the part of drawn object is outside the
window, the output will be clipped (not DrawLine 0,0,100,100
shown) and no error message is displayed.

248 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

SetWindow Catalog >
CXII
If xmin is greater than or equal to xmax or
ymin is greater than or equal to ymax, an
error message is shown.
Any objects drawn before a SetWindow
command will not be re-drawn in the new
configuration.
To reset the window parameters to the
default, use:
SetWindow 0,0,0,0

TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands 249

U

UseBuffer Catalog >

CXII
UseBuffer UseBuffer
For n,1,10
Draw to an off screen graphics buffer
instead of screen (to increase performance) x:=randInt(0,300)
y:=randInt(0,200)
This command is used in conjunction with
PaintBuffer to increase the speed of display radius:=randInt(10,50)
on the screen when the program generates Wait 0.5
multiple graphical objects. DrawCircle x,y,radius

With UseBuffer, all the graphics are EndFor

displayed only after the next PaintBuffer PaintBuffer
command is executed.
This program will display all the 10 circles at
UseBuffer only needs to be called once in once.
the program i.e. every use of PaintBuffer
does not need a corresponding UseBuffer If the “UseBuffer” command is removed,
each circle will be displayed as it is drawn.

See Also: PaintBuffer

250 TI-Nspire™ CX II - Draw Commands

Empty (Void) Elements
When analyzing real-world data, you might not always have a complete data set.
TI-Nspire™ CAS Software allows empty, or void, data elements so you can proceed
with the nearly complete data rather than having to start over or discard the
incomplete cases.
You can find an example of data involving empty elements in the Lists & Spreadsheet
chapter, under “Graphing spreadsheet data.”
The delVoid() function lets you remove empty elements from a list. The isVoid()
function lets you test for an empty element. For details, see delVoid() , page 49, and
isVoid() , page 94.
Note: To enter an empty element manually in a math expression, type “_” or the
keyword void. The keyword void is automatically converted to a “_” symbol when
the expression is evaluated. To type “_” on the handheld, press / _.

Calculations involving void elements

The majority of calculations involving a void
input will produce a void result. See special
cases below.

List arguments containing void elements

The following functions and commands
ignore (skip) void elements found in list
arguments.
count, countIf , cumulativeSum,
freqTable►list, frequency, max, mean,
median, product, stDevPop, stDevSamp,
sum, sumIf , varPop, and varSamp, as well as
regression calculations, OneVar, TwoVar,
and FiveNumSummary statistics, confidence
intervals, and stat tests

SortA and SortD move all void elements

within the first argument to the bottom.

Empty (Void) Elements 251

 List arguments containing void elements

In regressions, a void in an X or Y list

introduces a void for the corresponding
element of the residual.

An omitted category in regressions

introduces a void for the corresponding
element of the residual.

A frequency of 0 in regressions introduces a

void for the corresponding element of the
residual.

252 Empty (Void) Elements

Shortcuts for Entering Math Expressions
Shortcuts let you enter elements of math expressions by typing instead of using the
Catalog or Symbol Palette. For example, to enter the expression √6, you can type sqrt
(6) on the entry line. When you press ·, the expression sqrt(6) is changed to
√6. Some shortcuts are useful from both the handheld and the computer keyboard.
Others are useful primarily from the computer keyboard.

From the Handheld or Computer Keyboard

To enter this: Type this shortcut:
π pi
θ theta
∞ infinity
≤ <=
≥ >=
≠ /=
⇒ (logical implication) =>
⇔ (logical double implication, XNOR) <=>
→ (store operator) =:
| | (absolute value) abs(...)
√() sqrt(...)
d() derivative(...)
∫() integral(...)
Σ() (Sum template) sumSeq(...)
Π() (Product template) prodSeq(...)
sin⁻¹() , cos ⁻¹() , ... arcsin(...), arccos(...), ...
ΔList() deltaList(...)
ΔtmpCnv() deltaTmpCnv(...)

From the Computer Keyboard

To enter this: Type this shortcut:
c1, c2, ... (constants) @c1, @c2, ...

Shortcuts for Entering Math Expressions 253

 To enter this: Type this shortcut:
n1, n2, ... (integer constants) @n1, @n2, ...
i (imaginary constant) @i
e (natural log base e) @e
E (scientific notation) @E
T (transpose) @t
r (radians) @r
° (degrees) @d
g (gradians) @g
∠ (angle) @<
► (conversion) @>
►Decimal, ►approxFraction() , and @>Decimal, @>approxFraction(), and
so on. so on.

254 Shortcuts for Entering Math Expressions

EOS™ (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy
This section describes the Equation Operating System (EOS™) that is used by the
TI-Nspire™ CAS math and science learning technology. Numbers, variables, and
functions are entered in a simple, straightforward sequence. EOS™ software evaluates
expressions and equations using parenthetical grouping and according to the priorities
described below.
Order of Evaluation
Level Operator
1 Parentheses ( ), brackets [ ], braces { }
2 Indirection (#)
3 Function calls
4 Post operators: degrees-minutes-seconds ( °,',"), factorial (!), percentage
(%), radian ( r), subscript ([ ]), transpose ( T)
5 Exponentiation, power operator (^)
6 Negation ( ⁻)
7 String concatenation (&)
8 Multiplication ( •), division (/)
9 Addition (+), subtraction (-)
10 Equality relations: equal (=), not equal ( ≠ or /=),
less than (<), less than or equal ( ≤ or <=), greater than (>), greater than or
equal ( ≥ or >=)
11 Logical not
12 Logical and
13 Logical or
14 xor, nor, nand
15 Logical implication ( ⇒ )
16 Logical double implication, XNOR ( ⇔ )
17 Constraint operator (“|”)
18 Store ( → )

Parentheses, Brackets, and Braces

All calculations inside a pair of parentheses, brackets, or braces are evaluated first. For
example, in the expression 4(1+2), EOS™ software first evaluates the portion of the
expression inside the parentheses, 1+2, and then multiplies the result, 3, by 4.

EOS™ (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy 255

The number of opening and closing parentheses, brackets, and braces must be the
same within an expression or equation. If not, an error message is displayed that
indicates the missing element. For example, (1+2)/(3+4 will display the error message
“Missing ).”
Note: Because the TI-Nspire™ CAS software allows you to define your own functions, a
variable name followed by an expression in parentheses is considered a “function call”
instead of implied multiplication. For example a(b+c) is the function a evaluated by
b+c. To multiply the expression b+c by the variable a, use explicit multiplication: a•
(b+c).
Indirection
The indirection operator (#) converts a string to a variable or function name. For
example, #(“x”&”y”&”z”) creates the variable name xyz. Indirection also allows the
creation and modification of variables from inside a program. For example, if 10→ r
and “r”→ s1, then #s1=10.
Post Operators
Post operators are operators that come directly after an argument, such as 5!, 25%, or
60°15' 45". Arguments followed by a post operator are evaluated at the fourth priority
level. For example, in the expression 4^3!, 3! is evaluated first. The result, 6, then
becomes the exponent of 4 to yield 4096.
Exponentiation
Exponentiation (^) and element-by-element exponentiation (.^) are evaluated from
right to left. For example, the expression 2^3^2 is evaluated the same as 2^(3^2) to
produce 512. This is different from (2^3)^2, which is 64.
Negation

To enter a negative number, press v followed by the number. Post operations and
exponentiation are performed before negation. For example, the result of −x2 is a
negative number, and −92 = −81. Use parentheses to square a negative number such
as ( −9) 2 to produce 81.
Constraint (“|”)
The argument following the constraint (“|”) operator provides a set of constraints that
affect the evaluation of the argument preceding the operator.

256 EOS™ (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy

TI-Nspire CX II - TI-Basic Programming Features
Auto-indentation in Programming Editor
The TI-Nspire™ program editor now auto-indents statements inside a block command.
Block commands are If/EndIf, For/EndFor, While/EndWhile, Loop/EndLoop, Try/EndTry
The editor will automatically prepend spaces to program commands inside a block
command. The closing command of the block will be aligned with the opening
command.
The example below shows auto-indentation in nested block commands.

Code fragments that are copied and pasted will retain the original indentation.
Opening a program created in an earlier version of the software will retain the original
indentation.

Improved Error Messages for TI-Basic

Errors

Error Condition New message

Error in condition statement (If/While) A conditional statement did not resolve to TRUE
or FALSE
NOTE: With the change to place the cursor on
the line with the error, we no longer need to
specify if the error is in an "If" statement or a
"While" statement.

Missing EndIf Expected EndIf but found a different end

statement

Missing EndFor Expected EndFor but found a different end

statement

Missing EndWhile Expected EndWhile but found a different end

statement

Missing EndLoop Expected EndLoop but found a different end

statement

TI-Nspire CX II - TI-Basic Programming Features 257

 Error Condition New message

Missing EndTry Expected EndTry but found a different end

statement

“Then” omitted after If <condition> Missing If..Then

“Then” omitted after ElseIf <condition> Then missing in block: ElseIf.

When “Then”, “Else” and “ElseIf” were Else invalid outside of blocks: If..Then..EndIf or
encountered outside of control blocks Try..EndTry

“ElseIf” appears outside of “If..Then..EndIf” ElseIf invalid outside of block: If..Then..EndIf

block

"Then” appears outside of “If....EndIf” block Then invalid outside of block: If..EndIf

Syntax Errors
In case commands that expect one or more arguments are called with an incomplete
list of arguments, a “Too few argument error” will be issued instead of “syntax” error

Current behavior New CX II behavior

258 TI-Nspire CX II - TI-Basic Programming Features

 Current behavior New CX II behavior

Note: When an incomplete list of arguments is not followed by a comma, the error
message is: “too few arguments”. This is the same as previous releases.

TI-Nspire CX II - TI-Basic Programming Features 259

Constants and Values
The following table lists the constants and their values that are available when
performing unit conversions. They can be typed in manually or selected from the
Constants list in Utilities > Unit Conversions (Handheld: Press k 3).

Constant Name Value

_c Speed of light 299792458 _m/_s
_Cc Coulomb constant 8987551787.3682 _m/_F
_Fc Faraday constant 96485.33289 _coul/_mol
_g Acceleration of gravity 9.80665 _m/_s2
_Gc Gravitational constant 6.67408E-11 _m3/_kg/_s2
_h Planck's constant 6.626070040E-34 _J _s
_k Boltzmann's constant 1.38064852E-23 _J/_¡K
_m0 Permeability of a vacuum 1.2566370614359E-6 _N/_A2
_mb Bohr magneton 9.274009994E-24 _J _m2/_Wb
_Me Electron rest mass 9.10938356E-31 _kg
_Mm Muon mass 1.883531594E-28 _kg
_Mn Neutron rest mass 1.674927471E-27 _kg
_Mp Proton rest mass 1.672621898E-27 _kg
_Na Avogadro's number 6.022140857E23 /_mol
_q Electron charge 1.6021766208E-19 _coul
_Rb Bohr radius 5.2917721067E-11 _m
_Rc Molar gas constant 8.3144598 _J/_mol/_¡K
_Rdb Rydberg constant 10973731.568508/_m
_Re Electron radius 2.8179403227E-15 _m
_u Atomic mass 1.660539040E-27 _kg
_Vm Molar volume 2.2413962E-2 _m3/_mol
_H 0 Permittivity of a vacuum 8.8541878176204E-12 _F/_m
_s Stefan-Boltzmann constant 5.670367E-8 _W/_m2/_¡K4
_f 0 Magnetic flux quantum 2.067833831E-15 _Wb

260 Constants and Values

Error Codes and Messages
When an error occurs, its code is assigned to variable errCode . User-defined programs
and functions can examine errCode to determine the cause of an error. For an
example of using errCode , See Example 2 under the Try command, page 191.
Note: Some error conditions apply only to TI-Nspire™ CAS products, and some apply
only to TI-Nspire™ products.

Error
Description
code
10 A function did not return a value

20 A test did not resolve to TRUE or FALSE.

Generally, undefined variables cannot be compared. For example, the test If a<b will cause
this error if either a or b is undefined when the If statement is executed.

30 Argument cannot be a folder name.

40 Argument error

50 Argument mismatch

Two or more arguments must be of the same type.

60 Argument must be a Boolean expression or integer

70 Argument must be a decimal number

90 Argument must be a list

100 Argument must be a matrix

130 Argument must be a string

140 Argument must be a variable name.

Make sure that the name:

• does not begin with a digit
• does not contain spaces or special characters
• does not use underscore or period in invalid manner
• does not exceed the length limitations
See the Calculator section in the documentation for more details.

160 Argument must be an expression

165 Batteries too low for sending or receiving

Install new batteries before sending or receiving.

170 Bound

The lower bound must be less than the upper bound to define the search interval.

Error Codes and Messages 261

Error
Description
code
180 Break

The d or c key was pressed during a long calculation or during program execution.

190 Circular definition

This message is displayed to avoid running out of memory during infinite replacement of
variable values during simplification. For example, a+1->a, where a is an undefined variable,
will cause this error.

200 Constraint expression invalid

For example, solve(3x^2-4=0,x) | x<0 or x>5 would produce this error message because the
constraint is separated by “or” instead of “and.”

210 Invalid Data type

An argument is of the wrong data type.

220 Dependent limit

230 Dimension

A list or matrix index is not valid. For example, if the list {1,2,3,4} is stored in L1, then L1[5] is a
dimension error because L1 only contains four elements.

235 Dimension Error. Not enough elements in the lists.

240 Dimension mismatch

Two or more arguments must be of the same dimension. For example, [1,2]+[1,2,3] is a
dimension mismatch because the matrices contain a different number of elements.

250 Divide by zero

260 Domain error

An argument must be in a specified domain. For example, rand(0) is not valid.

270 Duplicate variable name

280 Else and ElseIf invalid outside of If...EndIf block

290 EndTry is missing the matching Else statement

295 Excessive iteration

300 Expected 2 or 3-element list or matrix

310 The first argument of nSolve must be an equation in a single variable. It cannot contain a non-
valued variable other than the variable of interest.

320 First argument of solve or cSolve must be an equation or inequality

For example, solve(3x^2-4,x) is invalid because the first argument is not an equation.

262 Error Codes and Messages

Error
Description
code
345 Inconsistent units

350 Index out of range

360 Indirection string is not a valid variable name

380 Undefined Ans

Either the previous calculation did not create Ans, or no previous calculation was entered.

390 Invalid assignment

400 Invalid assignment value

410 Invalid command

430 Invalid for the current mode settings

435 Invalid guess

440 Invalid implied multiply

For example, x(x+1) is invalid; whereas, x*(x+1) is the correct syntax. This is to avoid
confusion between implied multiplication and function calls.

450 Invalid in a function or current expression

Only certain commands are valid in a user-defined function.

490 Invalid in Try..EndTry block

510 Invalid list or matrix

550 Invalid outside function or program

A number of commands are not valid outside a function or program. For example, Local
cannot be used unless it is in a function or program.

560 Invalid outside Loop..EndLoop, For..EndFor, or While..EndWhile blocks

For example, the Exit command is valid only inside these loop blocks.

565 Invalid outside program

570 Invalid pathname

For example, \var is invalid.

575 Invalid polar complex

580 Invalid program reference

Programs cannot be referenced within functions or expressions such as 1+p(x) where p is a

program.

Error Codes and Messages 263

Error
Description
code
600 Invalid table

605 Invalid use of units

610 Invalid variable name in a Local statement

620 Invalid variable or function name

630 Invalid variable reference

640 Invalid vector syntax

650 Link transmission

A transmission between two units was not completed. Verify that the connecting cable is
connected firmly to both ends.

665 Matrix not diagonalizable

670 Low Memory

1. Delete some data in this document

2. Save and close this document

If 1 and 2 fail, pull out and re-insert batteries

672 Resource exhaustion

673 Resource exhaustion

680 Missing (

690 Missing )

700 Missing “

710 Missing ]

720 Missing }

730 Missing start or end of block syntax

740 Missing Then in the If..EndIf block

750 Name is not a function or program

765 No functions selected

780 No solution found

800 Non-real result

For example, if the software is in the Real setting, √(-1) is invalid.

264 Error Codes and Messages

Error
Description
code
To allow complex results, change the “Real or Complex” Mode Setting to RECTANGULAR or
POLAR.

830 Overflow

850 Program not found

A program reference inside another program could not be found in the provided path during
execution.

855 Rand type functions not allowed in graphing

860 Recursion too deep

870 Reserved name or system variable

900 Argument error

Median-median model could not be applied to data set.

910 Syntax error

920 Text not found

930 Too few arguments

The function or command is missing one or more arguments.

940 Too many arguments

The expression or equation contains an excessive number of arguments and cannot be

evaluated.

950 Too many subscripts

955 Too many undefined variables

960 Variable is not defined

No value is assigned to variable. Use one of the following commands:

• sto →
• :=
• Define
to assign values to variables.

965 Unlicensed OS

970 Variable in use so references or changes are not allowed

980 Variable is protected

990 Invalid variable name

Make sure that the name does not exceed the length limitations

Error Codes and Messages 265

Error
Description
code
1000 Window variables domain

1010 Zoom

1020 Internal error

1030 Protected memory violation

1040 Unsupported function. This function requires Computer Algebra System. Try TI-Nspire™
CAS.

1045 Unsupported operator. This operator requires Computer Algebra System. Try TI-Nspire™
CAS.

1050 Unsupported feature. This operator requires Computer Algebra System. Try TI-Nspire™
CAS.

1060 Input argument must be numeric. Only inputs containing numeric values are allowed.

1070 Trig function argument too big for accurate reduction

1080 Unsupported use of Ans.This application does not support Ans.

1090 Function is not defined. Use one of the following commands:

• Define
• :=
• sto →
to define a function.

1100 Non-real calculation

For example, if the software is in the Real setting, √(-1) is invalid.

To allow complex results, change the “Real or Complex” Mode Setting to RECTANGULAR or
POLAR.

1110 Invalid bounds

1120 No sign change

1130 Argument cannot be a list or matrix

1140 Argument error

The first argument must be a polynomial expression in the second argument. If the second
argument is omitted, the software attempts to select a default.

1150 Argument error

The first two arguments must be polynomial expressions in the third argument. If the third
argument is omitted, the software attempts to select a default.

1160 Invalid library pathname

266 Error Codes and Messages

Error
Description
code
A pathname must be in the form xxx\yyy, where:
• The xxx part can have 1 to 16 characters.
• The yyy part can have 1 to 15 characters.
See the Library section in the documentation for more details.

1170 Invalid use of library pathname

• A value cannot be assigned to a pathname using Define, :=, or sto → .
• A pathname cannot be declared as a Local variable or be used as a
parameter in a function or program definition.
1180 Invalid library variable name.

Make sure that the name:

• Does not contain a period
• Does not begin with an underscore
• Does not exceed 15 characters
See the Library section in the documentation for more details.

1190 Library document not found:

• Verify library is in the MyLib folder.
• Refresh Libraries.
See the Library section in the documentation for more details.

1200 Library variable not found:

• Verify library variable exists in the first problem in the library.
• Make sure library variable has been defined as LibPub or LibPriv.
• Refresh Libraries.
See the Library section in the documentation for more details.

1210 Invalid library shortcut name.

Make sure that the name:

• Does not contain a period
• Does not begin with an underscore
• Does not exceed 16 characters
• Is not a reserved name
See the Library section in the documentation for more details.

1220 Domain error:

The tangentLine and normalLine functions support real-valued functions only.

1230 Domain error.

Error Codes and Messages 267

Error
Description
code
Trigonometric conversion operators are not supported in Degree or Gradian angle modes.

1250 Argument Error

Use a system of linear equations.

Example of a system of two linear equations with variables x and y:

  3x+7y=5

  2y-5x=-1

1260 Argument Error:

The first argument of nfMin or nfMax must be an expression in a single variable. It cannot
contain a non-valued variable other than the variable of interest.

1270 Argument Error

Order of the derivative must be equal to 1 or 2.

1280 Argument Error

Use a polynomial in expanded form in one variable.

1290 Argument Error

Use a polynomial in one variable.

1300 Argument Error

The coefficients of the polynomial must evaluate to numeric values.

1310 Argument error:

A function could not be evaluated for one or more of its arguments.

1380 Argument error:

Nested calls to domain() function are not allowed.

268 Error Codes and Messages

Warning Codes and Messages
You can use the warnCodes() function to store the codes of warnings generated by
evaluating an expression. This table lists each numeric warning code and its associated
message. For an example of storing warning codes, see warnCodes() , page 200.

Warning
code Message
10000 Operation might introduce false solutions.

10001 Differentiating an equation may produce a false equation.

10002 Questionable solution

10003 Questionable accuracy

10004 Operation might lose solutions.

10005 cSolve might specify more zeros.

10006 Solve may specify more zeros.

10007 More solutions may exist. Try specifying appropriate lower and upper bounds and/or a
guess.

Examples using solve():

• solve(Equation, Var=Guess)|lowBound<Var<upBound
• solve(Equation, Var)|lowBound<Var<upBound
• solve(Equation, Var=Guess)
10008 Domain of the result might be smaller than the domain of the input.

10009 Domain of the result might be larger than the domain of the input.

10012 Non-real calculation

10013 ∞^0 or undef^0 replaced by 1

10014 undef^0 replaced by 1

10015 1^∞ or 1^undef replaced by 1

10016 1^undef replaced by 1

10017 Overflow replaced by ∞ or −∞

10018 Operation requires and returns 64 bit value.

10019 Resource exhaustion, simplification might be incomplete.

10020 Trig function argument too big for accurate reduction.

10021 Input contains an undefined parameter.

Result might not be valid for all possible parameter values.

Warning Codes and Messages 269

Warning
code Message
10022 Specifying appropriate lower and upper bounds might produce a solution.

10023 Scalar has been multiplied by the identity matrix.

10024 Result obtained using approximate arithmetic.

10025 Equivalence cannot be verified in EXACT mode.

10026 Constraint might be ignored. Specify constraint in the form "\" 'Variable MathTestSymbol
Constant' or a conjunct of these forms, for example 'x<3 and x>-12'

270 Warning Codes and Messages

General Information
Online Help
education.ti.com/eguide
Select your country for more product information.

Contact TI Support
education.ti.com/ti-cares
Select your country for technical and other support resources.

Service and Warranty Information

education.ti.com/warranty
Select your country for information about the length and terms of the warranty or
about product service.
Limited Warranty. This warranty does not affect your statutory rights.

General Information 271

Index ^, power 213

_
-
_, unit designation 230
-, subtract 210
|
!
|, constraint operator 232
!, factorial 220
′
"
′ minute notation 228
", second notation 228 ′, prime 230
# +
#, indirection 226 +, add 210
#, indirection operator 256
=
%
≠, not equal 217
%, percent 216 ≤, less than or equal 218
≥, greater than or equal 219
& >, greater than 218
&, append =, equal 216
220

* ∏

*, multiply ∏, product 223

211

. ∑

.-, dot subtraction ∑( ), sum 224

214
.*, dot multiplication ∑Int( ) 225
215
./, dot division ∑Prn( ) 225
215
.^, dot power 215 √
.+, dot addition 214
√, square root 223
/
∠
/, divide 212
∠ (angle) 229
:
∫
:=, assign 234
∫, integral 221
^
^⁻¹, reciprocal 232

Index 272
 ► 1
►, convert units 231 10^( ), power of ten 231
►approxFraction( ) 13
►Base10, display as decimal integer 18 2
►Base16, display as hexadecimal 19 2-sample F Test 75
►Base2, display as binary 17
►cos, display in terms of cosine 29 A
►Cylind, display as cylindrical vector 42
►DD, display as decimal angle abs( ), absolute value 8
45
►Decimal, display result as decimal absolute value
45
template for 3-4
►DMS, display as
add, + 210
degree/minute/second 54
►exp, display in terms of e amortization table, amortTbl( ) 8, 17
63
►Grad, convert to gradian angle amortTbl( ), amortization table 8, 17
86
►Polar, display as polar vector and, Boolean operator 9
133
►Rad, convert to radian angle angle( ), angle 10
143
►Rect, display as rectangular vector angle, angle( ) 10
146
►sin, display in terms of sine ANOVA, one-way variance analysis 10
166
►Sphere, display as spherical vector ANOVA2way, two-way variance
175
analysis 11
⇒ Ans, last answer 13
answer (last), Ans 13
⇒ , logical implication 219, 253 append, & 220
approx( ), approximate 13-14
→
approximate, approx( ) 13-14
→, store variable 233 approxRational( ) 14
arc length, arcLen( ) 15
⇔ arccos(), cos⁻¹() 14
arccosh(), cosh⁻¹() 14
⇔ , logical double implication 220, 253
arccot(), cot⁻¹() 14
© arccoth(), coth⁻¹() 14
arccsc(), csc⁻¹() 14
©, comment 235 arccsch(), csch⁻¹() 14
arcLen( ), arc length 15
°
arcsec(), sec⁻¹() 15
°, degree notation 228 arcsech(), csech⁻¹() 15
°, degrees/minutes/seconds 228 arcsin(), sin⁻¹() 15
arcsinh(), sinh⁻¹() 15
0 arctan(), tan⁻¹() 15
arctanh(), tanh⁻¹() 15
0b, binary indicator 235
arguments in TVM functions 195
0h, hexadecimal indicator 235
augment( ), augment/concatenate 15
augment/concatenate, augment( ) 15

273 Index
average rate of change, avgRC( ) 16 comment, © 235
avgRC( ), average rate of change 16 common denominator, comDenom
( ) 26
B completeSquare( ), complete square 27
complex
binary conjugate, conj( ) 28
display, ►Base2 17 factor, cFactor( ) 21
indicator, 0b 235 solve, cSolve( ) 38
binomCdf( ) 20, 92 zeros, cZeros( ) 43
binomPdf( ) 20 conj( ), complex conjugate 28
Boolean operators
constant
⇒ 219, 253 in solve( ) 171
⇔ 220 constants
and 9 in cSolve( ) 39
nand 119 in cZeros( ) 44
nor 123 in deSolve( ) 49
not 125 in solve( ) 173
or 129 in zeros( ) 203
xor 201 shortcuts for 253
constraint operator "|" 232
C
constraint operator, order of
Cdf( ) 68 evaluation 255
ceiling( ), ceiling 20 construct matrix, constructMat( ) 28
ceiling, ceiling( ) 20-21, 36 constructMat( ), construct matrix 28
centralDiff( ) 21 convert
cFactor( ), complex factor ►Grad 86
21
char( ), character string ►Rad 143
22
character string, char( ) units 231
22
characters copy variable or function, CopyVar 29
numeric code, ord( ) 130 correlation matrix, corrMat( ) 29
string, char( ) 22 corrMat( ), correlation matrix 29
charPoly( ) 23 cos⁻¹, arccosine 31
χ²2way 23 cos( ), cosine 30
clear cosh⁻¹( ), hyperbolic arccosine 32
error, ClrErr 25 cosh( ), hyperbolic cosine 32
Clear 239 cosine
ClearAZ 25 display expression in terms of 29
ClrErr, clear error 25 cosine, cos( ) 30
colAugment 26 cot⁻¹( ), arccotangent 33
colDim( ), matrix column dimension 26 cot( ), cotangent 33
colNorm( ), matrix column norm 26 cotangent, cot( ) 33
combinations, nCr( ) 120 coth⁻¹( ), hyperbolic arccotangent 34
comDenom( ), common coth( ), hyperbolic cotangent 34
denominator 26 count days between dates, dbd( ) 44

Index 274
count items in a list conditionally , delete
countif( ) 35 void elements from list 49
count items in a list, count( ) 34 deleting
count( ), count items in a list 34 variable, DelVar 48
countif( ), conditionally count items deltaList() 48
in a list 35 deltaTmpCnv() 48
cPolyRoots() 36 DelVar, delete variable 48
cross product, crossP( ) 36 delVoid( ), remove void elements 49
crossP( ), cross product 36 denominator 26
csc⁻¹( ), inverse cosecant 37 derivative or nth derivative
csc( ), cosecant 36 template for 6
csch⁻¹( ), inverse hyperbolic cosecant 37 derivative() 49
csch( ), hyperbolic cosecant 37 derivatives
cSolve( ), complex solve 38 first derivative, d( ) 221
cubic regression, CubicReg 40 numeric derivative, nDeriv( ) 121-122
CubicReg, cubic regression 40 numeric derivative, nDerivative( 
cumulative sum, cumulativeSum( ) 41 ) 121
cumulativeSum( ), cumulative sum deSolve( ), solution 49
41
cycle, Cycle det( ), matrix determinant 51
42
Cycle, cycle diag( ), matrix diagonal 51
42
cylindrical vector display, ►Cylind dim( ), dimension 52
42
cZeros( ), complex zeros dimension, dim( ) 52
43
Disp, display data 52, 158
D DispAt 52
display as
d( ), first derivative 221 binary, ►Base2 17
days between dates, dbd( ) 44 cylindrical vector, ►Cylind 42
dbd( ), days between dates 44 decimal angle, ►DD 45
decimal decimal integer, ►Base10 18
angle display, ►DD 45 degree/minute/second, ►DMS 54
integer display, ►Base10 18 hexadecimal, ►Base16 19
Define 46 polar vector, ►Polar 133
Define LibPriv 47 rectangular vector, ►Rect 146
Define LibPub 47 spherical vector, ►Sphere 175
define, Define 46 display data, Disp 52, 158
Define, define 46 distribution functions
defining binomCdf( ) 20, 92
private function or program 47 binomPdf( ) 20
public function or program 47 invNorm( ) 92
definite integral invt( ) 92
template for 6 Invχ²( ) 91
degree notation, ° 228 normCdf( ) 125
degree/minute/second display,
normPdf( ) 125
►DMS 54
degree/minute/second notation poissCdf( ) 132
228

275 Index
 poissPdf( ) 132 if, EndIf 86
tCdf( ) 185 loop, EndLoop 110
tPdf( ) 190 program, EndPrgm 137
χ²2way( ) 23 try, EndTry 191
χ²Cdf( ) 24 while, EndWhile 201
χ²GOF( ) 24 end function, EndFunc 75
χ²Pdf( ) 24 end if, EndIf 86
divide, / 212 end loop, EndLoop 110
domain function, domain( ) 55 end while, EndWhile 201
domain( ), domain function 55 EndTry, end try 191
dominant term, dominantTerm( ) 55 EndWhile, end while 201
dominantTerm( ), dominant term 55 EOS (Equation Operating System) 255
dot equal, = 216
addition, .+ 214 Equation Operating System (EOS) 255
division, ./ 215 error codes and messages 261, 269
multiplication, .* 215 errors and troubleshooting
power, .^ 215 clear error, ClrErr 25
product, dotP( ) 57 pass error, PassErr 131
subtraction, .- 214 euler( ), Euler function 60
dotP( ), dot product 57 evaluate polynomial, polyEval( ) 135
draw 240-242 evaluation, order of 255
exact( ), exact 62
E exact, exact( ) 62
e exponent exclusion with "|" operator 232
template for 2 exit, Exit 63
e to a power, e^( ) 57, 63 Exit, exit 63
e, display expression in terms of 63 exp( ), e to a power 63
E, exponent 227 exp►list( ), expression to list 64
e^( ), e to a power 57 expand( ), expand 64
eff( ), convert nominal to effective expand, expand( ) 64
rate 58 exponent, E 227
effective rate, eff( ) 58 exponential regession, ExpReg 66
eigenvalue, eigVl( ) 59 exponents
eigenvector, eigVc( ) 58 template for 1
eigVc( ), eigenvector 58 expr( ), string to expression 65, 107
eigVl( ), eigenvalue 59 ExpReg, exponential regession 66
else if, ElseIf 59 expressions
else, Else expression to list, exp►list( ) 64
86
ElseIf, else if string to expression, expr( ) 65, 107
59
empty (void) elements 251 F
end
for, EndFor 72 factor( ), factor 67
function, EndFunc 75 factor, factor( ) 67

Index 276
factorial, ! 220 get/return
fill 243-244 denominator, getDenom( ) 78
Fill, matrix fill 69 number, getNum( ) 84
financial functions, tvmFV( ) 193 variables injformation,
financial functions, tvmI( ) 193 getVarInfo( ) 82, 85
financial functions, tvmN( ) getDenom( ), get/return
194
denominator 78
financial functions, tvmPmt( ) 194 getKey() 78
financial functions, tvmPV( ) 194 getLangInfo( ), get/return language
first derivative
information 82
template for 5 getLockInfo( ), tests lock status of
FiveNumSummary 69 variable or variable group 82
floor( ), floor 70 getMode( ), get mode settings 83
floor, floor( ) 70 getNum( ), get/return number 84
fMax( ), function maximum 70 GetStr 84
fMin( ), function minimum 71 getType( ), get type of variable 84
For 72 getVarInfo( ), get/return variables
for, For 72 information 85
For, for 72 go to, Goto 86
format string, format( ) 72 Goto, go to 86
format( ), format string 72 gradian notation, g 227
fpart( ), function part 73 greater than or equal, ≥ 219
fractions greater than, > 218
propFrac 139 greatest common divisor, gcd( ) 76
template for 1 groups, locking and unlocking 106, 197
freqTable( ) 73 groups, testing lock status 82
frequency( ) 74
Frobenius norm, norm( ) 124 H
Func, function 75 hexadecimal
Func, program function 75 display, ►Base16 19
functions indicator, 0h 235
maximum, fMax( ) 70 hyperbolic
minimum, fMin( ) 71 arccosine, cosh⁻¹( ) 32
part, fpart( ) 73 arcsine, sinh⁻¹( ) 168
program function, Func 75 arctangent, tanh⁻¹( ) 184
user-defined 46 cosine, cosh( ) 32
functions and variables sine, sinh( ) 168
copying 29 tangent, tanh( ) 184
G
I
g, gradians 227 identity matrix, identity( ) 86
gcd( ), greatest common divisor 76 identity( ), identity matrix 86
geomCdf( ) 76 if, If 86
geomPdf( ) 77 If, if 86
Get 77, 245

277 Index
ifFn( ) 88 less than or equal, ≤ 218
imag( ), imaginary part 88 LibPriv 47
imaginary part, imag( ) 88 LibPub 47
ImpDif( ), implicit derivative 89 library
implicit derivative, Impdif( ) 89 create shortcuts to objects 96
indefinite integral libShortcut( ), create shortcuts to
template for 6 library objects 96
indirection operator (#) 256 limit
indirection, # lim( ) 96
226
input, Input limit( ) 96
89
Input, input template for 6
89
inString( ), within string limit( ) or lim( ), limit 96
89
int( ), integer linear regression, LinRegAx 98
90
intDiv( ), integer divide linear regression, LinRegBx 97, 99
90
integer divide, intDiv( ) LinRegBx, linear regression 97
90
integer part, iPart( ) LinRegMx, linear regression 98
93
integer, int( ) LinRegtIntervals, linear regression 99
90
integral, ∫ LinRegtTest 101
221
interpolate( ), interpolate linSolve() 102
90
inverse cumulative normal Δlist( ), list difference 103
distribution (invNorm(  ) 92 list to matrix, list►mat( ) 103
inverse, ^⁻¹ 232 list, conditionally count items in 35
invF( ) 91 list, count items in 34
invNorm( ), inverse cumulative list►mat( ), list to matrix 103
normal distribution) 92 lists
invt( ) 92 augment/concatenate,
Invχ²( ) 91 augment( ) 15
iPart( ), integer part cross product, crossP( ) 36
93
irr( ), internal rate of return cumulative sum,
internal rate of return, irr( ) 93 cumulativeSum( ) 41
isPrime( ), prime test differences in a list, Δlist( ) 103
93
isVoid( ), test for void dot product, dotP( ) 57
94
empty elements in 251
L expression to list, exp►list( ) 64
list to matrix, list►mat( ) 103
label, Lbl 95 matrix to list, mat►list( ) 111
language maximum, max( ) 111
get language information 82 mid-string, mid( ) 114
Lbl, label 95 minimum, min( ) 115
lcm, least common multiple 95 new, newList( ) 121
least common multiple, lcm 95 product, product( ) 138
left( ), left 95 sort ascending, SortA 174
left, left( ) 95 sort descending, SortD 175
length of string 52 summation, sum( ) 180

Index 278
ln( ), natural logarithm 103 lower-upper decomposition, LU 110
LnReg, logarithmic regression 104 matrix to list, mat►list( ) 111
local variable, Local 105 maximum, max( ) 111
local, Local 105 minimum, min( ) 115
Local, local variable 105 new, newMat( ) 121
Lock, lock variable or variable group 106 product, product( ) 138
locking variables and variable groups 106 QR factorization, QR 139
Log random, randMat( ) 145
template for 2 reduced row echelon form, rref( 
logarithmic regression, LnReg 104 ) 156
logarithms 103 row addition, rowAdd( ) 155
logical double implication, ⇔ 220 row dimension, rowDim( ) 156
logical implication, ⇒ 219, 253 row echelon form, ref( ) 147
logistic regression, Logistic 107 row multiplication and addition,
logistic regression, LogisticD 108 mRowAdd( ) 116
Logistic, logistic regression row norm, rowNorm( ) 156
107
LogisticD, logistic regression row operation, mRow( ) 116
108
loop, Loop row swap, rowSwap( ) 156
110
Loop, loop submatrix, subMat( ) 180-181
110
LU, matrix lower-upper summation, sum( ) 180
decomposition 110 transpose, T 182
matrix (1 × 2)
M template for 4
matrix (2 × 1)
mat►list( ), matrix to list 111 template for 4
matrices matrix (2 × 2)
augment/concatenate, template for 4
augment( ) 15
matrix (m × n)
column dimension, colDim( ) 26 template for 4
column norm, colNorm( ) 26 matrix to list, mat►list( ) 111
cumulative sum,
max( ), maximum 111
cumulativeSum( ) 41
maximum, max( ) 111
determinant, det( ) 51
mean( ), mean 112
diagonal, diag( ) 51
mean, mean( ) 112
dimension, dim( ) 52
median( ), median 112
dot addition, .+ 214
median, median( ) 112
dot division, ./ 215
medium-medium line regression,
dot multiplication, .* 215
MedMed 113
dot power, .^ 215 MedMed, medium-medium line
dot subtraction, .- 214 regression 113
eigenvalue, eigVl( ) 59 mid-string, mid( ) 114
eigenvector, eigVc( ) 58 mid( ), mid-string 114
filling, Fill 69 min( ), minimum 115
identity, identity( ) 86 minimum, min( ) 115
list to matrix, list►mat( ) 103 minute notation, ′ 228

279 Index
mirr( ), modified internal rate of normalLine( ) 124
return 115 normCdf( ) 125
mixed fractions, using propFrac(› normPdf( ) 125
with 139 not equal, ≠ 217
mod( ), modulo 116 not, Boolean operator 125
mode settings, getMode( ) 83 nPr( ), permutations 126
modes
npv( ), net present value 126
setting, setMode( ) 162
nSolve( ), numeric solution 127
modified internal rate of return, mirr
nth root
( ) 115
template for 1
modulo, mod( ) 116
numeric
mRow( ), matrix row operation 116 derivative, nDeriv( ) 121-122
mRowAdd( ), matrix row
derivative, nDerivative( ) 121
multiplication and addition 116
Multiple linear regression t test integral, nInt( ) 122
118
multiply, * solution, nSolve( ) 127
211
MultReg 117 O
MultRegIntervals( ) 117
MultRegTests( ) 118 objects
create shortcuts to library 96
N one-variable statistics, OneVar 128
OneVar, one-variable statistics 128
nand, Boolean operator 119
operators
natural logarithm, ln( ) 103 order of evaluation 255
nCr( ), combinations 120 or (Boolean), or 129
nDerivative( ), numeric derivative 121 or, Boolean operator 129
negation, entering negative numbers 256 ord( ), numeric character code 130
net present value, npv( ) 126
new P
list, newList( ) 121
matrix, newMat( ) 121 P►Rx( ), rectangular x coordinate 130
newList( ), new list 121 P►Ry( ), rectangular y coordinate 131
newMat( ), new matrix 121 pass error, PassErr 131
nfMax( ), numeric function PassErr, pass error 131
maximum 121 Pdf( ) 73
nfMin( ), numeric function minimum 122 percent, % 216
nInt( ), numeric integral 122 permutations, nPr( ) 126
nom ), convert effective to nominal piecewise function (2-piece)
rate 123 template for 2
nominal rate, nom( ) 123 piecewise function (N-piece)
nor, Boolean operator 123 template for 3
norm( ), Frobenius norm 124 piecewise( ) 132
normal distribution probability, poissCdf( ) 132
normCdf( ) 125 poissPdf( ) 132
normal line, normalLine( ) 124

Index 280
polar QR, QR factorization 139
coordinate, R►Pr( ) 143 quadratic regression, QuadReg 140
coordinate, R►Pθ( ) 142 QuadReg, quadratic regression 140
vector display, ►Polar 133 quartic regression, QuartReg 141
polyCoef( ) 133 QuartReg, quartic regression 141
polyDegree( ) 134
polyEval( ), evaluate polynomial 135 R
polyGcd( ) 135-136 R, radian 227
polynomials
R►Pr( ), polar coordinate 143
evaluate, polyEval( ) 135
R►Pθ( ), polar coordinate 142
random, randPoly( ) 145
radian, R 227
PolyRoots() 136
rand( ), random number 143
power of ten, 10^( ) 231
randBin, random number 144
power regression,
PowerReg 136, 149, 151, 187 randInt( ), random integer 144
power, ^ 213 randMat( ), random matrix 145
PowerReg, power regression 136 randNorm( ), random norm 145
Prgm, define program 137 random
prime number test, isPrime( ) matrix, randMat( ) 145
93
prime, ′ norm, randNorm( ) 145
230
probability densiy, normPdf( ) number seed, RandSeed 146
125
prodSeq() polynomial, randPoly( ) 145
138
product( ), product random sample 145
138
product, ∏( ) randPoly( ), random polynomial 145
223
template for randSamp( ) 145
5
product, product( ) RandSeed, random number seed 146
138
programming real( ), real 146
define program, Prgm 137 real, real( ) 146
display data, Disp 52, 158 reciprocal, ^⁻¹ 232
pass error, PassErr 131 rectangular-vector display, ►Rect 146
programs rectangular x coordinate, P►Rx( ) 130
defining private library 47 rectangular y coordinate, P►Ry( ) 131
defining public library 47 reduced row echelon form, rref( ) 156
programs and programming ref( ), row echelon form 147
clear error, ClrErr 25 RefreshProbeVars 148
display I/O screen, Disp 52, 158 regressions
end program, EndPrgm 137 cubic, CubicReg 40
end try, EndTry 191 exponential, ExpReg 66
try, Try 191 linear regression, LinRegAx 98
proper fraction, propFrac 139 linear regression, LinRegBx 97, 99
propFrac, proper fraction 139 logarithmic, LnReg 104
Logistic 107
Q logistic, Logistic 108
medium-medium line, MedMed 113
QR factorization, QR 139

281 Index
 MultReg 117 seqGen( ) 159
power regression, seqn( ) 160
PowerReg 136, 149, 151, 187 sequence, seq( ) 159-160
quadratic, QuadReg 140 series( ), series 161
quartic, QuartReg 141 series, series( ) 161
sinusoidal, SinReg 169 set
remain( ), remainder 149 mode, setMode( ) 162
remainder, remain( ) 149 setMode( ), set mode 162
remove settings, get current 83
void elements from list 49 shift( ), shift 163
Request 149 shift, shift( ) 163
RequestStr 151 sign( ), sign 165
result sign, sign( ) 165
display in terms of cosine 29 simult( ), simultaneous equations 165
display in terms of e 63 simultaneous equations, simult( ) 165
display in terms of sine 166 sin⁻¹( ), arcsine 167
result values, statistics 177 sin( ), sine 166
results, statistics 176 sine
return, Return 152 display expression in terms of 166
Return, return 152 sine, sin( ) 166
right( ), right 152 sinh⁻¹( ), hyperbolic arcsine 168
right, right( ) 27, 60, 90, 152 sinh( ), hyperbolic sine 168
rk23( ), Runge Kutta function 152 SinReg, sinusoidal regression 169
rotate( ), rotate 154 sinusoidal regression, SinReg 169
rotate, rotate( ) 154 solution, deSolve( ) 49
round( ), round 155 solve( ), solve 170
round, round( ) 155 solve, solve( ) 170
row echelon form, ref( ) 147 SortA, sort ascending 174
rowAdd( ), matrix row addition 155 SortD, sort descending 175
rowDim( ), matrix row dimension 156 sorting
rowNorm( ), matrix row norm 156 ascending, SortA 174
rowSwap( ), matrix row swap 156 descending, SortD 175
rref( ), reduced row echelon form 156 spherical vector display, ►Sphere 175
sqrt( ), square root 176
S square root
template for 1
sec⁻¹( ), inverse secant 157
square root, √( ) 176, 223
sec( ), secant 157
standard deviation, stdDev( ) 178, 198
sech⁻¹( ), inverse hyperbolic secant 158
stat.results 176
sech( ), hyperbolic secant 158
stat.values 177
second derivative
template for statistics
6
combinations, nCr( ) 120
second notation, " 228
factorial, ! 220
seq( ), sequence 159
mean, mean( ) 112

Index 282
 median, median( ) 112 sum of principal payments 225
one-variable statistics, OneVar 128 sum( ), summation 180
permutations, nPr( ) 126 sum, ∑( ) 224
random norm, randNorm( ) 145 template for 5
random number seed, sumIf( ) 180
RandSeed 146 summation, sum( ) 180
standard deviation, stdDev( ) 178, 198 sumSeq() 181
two-variable results, TwoVar 195 system of equations (2-equation)
variance, variance( ) 198 template for 3
stdDevPop( ), population standard system of equations (N-equation)
deviation 178 template for 3
stdDevSamp( ), sample standard
deviation 178 T
Stop command 179
store variable (→) t test, tTest 192
233
storing T, transpose 182
symbol, & 234 tan⁻¹( ), arctangent 183
string tan( ), tangent 182
dimension, dim( ) 52 tangent line, tangentLine( ) 183
length 52 tangent, tan( ) 182
string( ), expression to string 179 tangentLine( ) 183
strings tanh⁻¹( ), hyperbolic arctangent 184
append, & 220 tanh( ), hyperbolic tangent 184
character code, ord( ) 130 Taylor polynomial, taylor( ) 185
character string, char( ) 22 taylor( ), Taylor polynomial 185
expression to string, string( ) 179 tCdf( ), studentt distribution
format, format( ) 72 probability 185
formatting 72 tCollect( ), trigonometric collection 186
indirection, # 226 templates
left, left( ) absolute value 3-4
95
mid-string, mid( ) definite integral 6
114
right, right( ) derivative or nth derivative 6
27, 60, 90, 152
rotate, rotate( ) e exponent 2
154
shift, shift( ) exponent 1
163
string to expression, expr( ) first derivative 5
65, 107
using to create variable names fraction 1
256
within, InString indefinite integral 6
89
student-t distribution probability, limit 6
tCdf( ) 185 Log 2
student-t probability density, tPdf( ) 190 matrix (1 × 2) 4
subMat( ), submatrix 180-181 matrix (2 × 1) 4
submatrix, subMat( ) 180-181 matrix (2 × 2) 4
substitution with "|" operator 232 matrix (m × n) 4
subtract, - 210 nth root 1
sum of interest payments 225 piecewise function (2-piece) 2

283 Index
 piecewise function (N-piece) 3 unit vector, unitV( ) 197
product, ∏( ) 5 units
second derivative 6 convert 231
square root 1 unitV( ), unit vector 197
sum, ∑( ) 5 unLock, unlock variable or variable
system of equations (2- group 197
equation) 3 unlocking variables and variable
system of equations (N- groups 197
equation) 3 user-defined functions 46
test for void, isVoid( ) 94 user-defined functions and
Test_2S, 2-sample F test 75 programs 47
tExpand( ), trigonometric expansion 186 V
Text command 187
time value of money, Future Value 193 variable
time value of money, Interest 193 creating name from a character
time value of money, number of string 256
payments 194 variable and functions
time value of money, payment copying 29
amount 194 variables
time value of money, present value 194 clear all single-letter 25
tInterval, t confidence interval 187 delete, DelVar 48
tInterval_2Samp, twosample t local, Local 105
confidence interval 188 variables, locking and unlocking 82, 106, 197
ΔtmpCnv() 189 variance, variance( ) 198
tmpCnv() 189 varPop( ) 198
tPdf( ), student probability density 190 varSamp( ), sample variance 198
trace( ) 190 vectors
transpose, T 182 cross product, crossP( ) 36
trigonometric collection, tCollect( ) 186 cylindrical vector display,
trigonometric expansion, tExpand( ) 186 ►Cylind 42
Try, error handling command dot product, dotP( ) 57
191
tTest, t test unit, unitV( ) 197
192
tTest_2Samp, two-sample t test void elements 251
192
TVM arguments void elements, remove 49
195
tvmFV( ) void, test for 94
193
tvmI( ) 193 W
tvmN( ) 194
tvmPmt( ) 194 Wait command 199
tvmPV( ) 194 warnCodes( ), Warning codes 200
two-variable results, TwoVar 195 warning codes and messages 269
TwoVar, two-variable results 195 when( ), when 200
when, when( ) 200
U while, While 201
underscore, _ While, while 201
230

Index 284
with, | 232
within string, inString( ) 89

X
x², square 214
XNOR 220
xor, Boolean exclusive or 201

Z
zeroes( ), zeroes 202
zeroes, zeroes( ) 202
zInterval, z confidence interval 204
zInterval_1Prop, one-proportion z
confidence interval 205
zInterval_2Prop, two-proportion z
confidence interval 205
zInterval_2Samp, two-sample z
confidence interval 206
zTest 206
zTest_1Prop, one-proportion z test 207
zTest_2Prop, two-proportion z test 207
zTest_2Samp, two-sample z test 208

Χ
χ²Cdf( ) 24
χ²GOF 24
χ²Pdf( ) 24

285 Index